Rohde & Schwarz R&S SMW200A User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Portable Generator
  5. SMW200A
  6. User manual

Rohde & Schwarz R&S SMW200A User Manual

Vector signal generator
Hide thumbs Also See for R&S SMW200A:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
SMW200A
Vector Signal Generator
User Manual
(;ÙÐP2)
1175663202
Version 38

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the R&S SMW200A and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz R&S SMW200A

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz R&S SMW200A

  • Page 1 ® R&S SMW200A Vector Signal Generator User Manual (;ÙÐP2) 1175663202 Version 38...
  • Page 2 ® This document describes the R&S SMW200A, stock no. 1412.0000.02 and the following options: ● ® R&S SMW-B9/-B10 ● ® R&S SMW-B13/-B13T/-B13XT ● ® R&S SMW-B20/-B22 ● ® R&S SMW-B81/-B82/-B83/-B84 ● ® R&S SMW-B90/-B93 ● ® R&S SMW-B1003/-B1006/-B1007/-B1012/-B1020/-B1031/-B1040/-B1044/-B1056/-B1067 ® R&S SMW-B1040N/-B1044N/-B1056N/-B1067N ®...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S SMW200A Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............19 Safety instructions......................19 Labels on R&S SMW200A..................22 Warning messages in the documentation..............22 Where to find key documents on Rohde & Schwarz..........23 Korea certification class B..................23 2 Welcome to the R&S SMW200A............24 Key features.........................24 What's new........................24 Documentation overview....................25...
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 3.1.8 Connecting USB devices....................34 3.1.9 Connecting to RF coaxial connectors................35 3.1.10 Connecting to RF A/RF B....................36 3.1.11 Connecting to LO In/Out....................36 3.1.12 Connecting to REF IN/REF OUT.................. 37 3.1.13 Connecting to HS DIG I/Q.....................37 3.1.14 Switching on or off......................38 Instrument tour......................39...
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S SMW200A Working with the system configuration function...........108 4.1.1 Configuring the system for your test case..............108 4.1.2 Test scenario and required system configuration............109 Possible ways to configure the signal flow............113 4.2.1 Using the signal routing settings and the block diagram..........113 4.2.2 Using the system configuration capabilities..............114 Overview of the signals and interfaces..............116...
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 4.9.5 How to cable the instruments in MIMO test setups.............199 4.9.6 How to connect and configure external instruments........... 200 4.9.7 Connecting to HS DIG I/Q interfaces................209 4.9.8 How to generate a 2x8 MIMO signal for BS tests............214 4.9.9 How to generate a 8x8 MIMO signal with two R&S SMW200A........
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 5.8.3 Notch filter settings......................366 5.8.4 AWGN test signal settings...................370 Reducing the crest factor..................372 5.10 Generating multi-segment waveform files..............372 5.10.1 Required options......................372 5.10.2 About the multi-segment waveforms................372 5.10.3 Multi-segment settings....................378 5.10.4 Working with multi-segment waveform files..............393 5.10.5 Reference to triggering of multi-segment waveforms..........399 5.11...
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise..............454 6.3.1 Required options......................454 6.3.2 About the impulsive noise................... 454 6.3.3 About the phase noise....................455 6.3.4 Impulsive noise settings....................456 6.3.5 Phase noise settings....................459 Impairing the signal....................461 6.4.1 Required options......................
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling..................505 8.9.1 Required options......................507 8.9.2 Phase coherence......................507 8.9.3 LO coupling settings....................508 8.9.4 How to configure cascaded instruments..............510 8.10 Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode............514 8.10.1 Signal generation and triggering in the sweep and list modes........516 8.10.2 About sweep mode.....................
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels........... 652 9.2.1 Required options......................652 9.2.2 About leveling......................652 9.2.3 Baseband power settings....................658 9.2.4 Measuring baseband power levels................661 10 Multi-instrument setups..............670 10.1 Synchronizing instruments..................670 10.2 Generating phase coherent signals................ 670 10.3 Generating time-aligned baseband signals............671 10.3.1...
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 11.5.1 File select settings.......................715 11.5.2 Creating data lists and control lists................718 11.6 Exporting and importing remote command lists........... 719 11.7 Loading, importing and exporting lists..............719 11.8 Using the file manager....................720 11.8.1 File manager settings....................721 11.8.2 Map network share settings..................
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 12.3 Checking parameters and dependencies............... 764 12.4 Organizing frequently used settings as favorites..........766 12.4.1 User menu settings..................... 767 12.4.2 How to use the user menu for fast adjustments............768 12.4.3 Define user key actions settings................. 770 12.4.4 How to assign actions to the [USER] key..............771 12.5 Managing licenses and license keys...............773...
  • Page 13 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 13.4.2 Instrument-specific status operation register.............. 832 13.4.3 Instrument-specific status questionable register............832 13.4.4 Reset values of the status reporting system............... 833 13.5 Remote access settings................... 833 13.5.1 Network settings......................835 13.5.2 VISA resource strings....................839 13.5.3 GPIB address settings....................840 13.5.4 RS232 settings......................841 13.5.5...
  • Page 14 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 13.13.5 How to convert and save SCPI lists................888 13.13.6 How to find out the SCPI commands for GUI functions..........889 13.14 To operate the instrument using VNC..............892 13.14.1 Enabling VNC service....................893 13.14.2 How to set up remote operation from a desktop system..........893 13.14.3 How to set up remote operation from a smart device..........
  • Page 15 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 14.17 SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems............957 14.18 SCONfiguration subsystem..................972 14.18.1 Multi-instrument configuration commands..............982 14.18.2 Baseband and fading configuration commands............983 14.18.3 I/Q stream mapper commands..................989 14.18.4 External RF and I/Q instruments commands.............. 991 14.18.5 RF ports alignment commands.................
  • Page 16 ® Contents R&S SMW200A 14.24 UNIT subsystem...................... 1348 15 Troubleshooting and notifications..........1350 15.1 Notifications......................1350 15.1.1 Volatile notifications....................1350 15.1.2 Permanent notifications.....................1351 15.2 SCPI notifications....................1351 15.3 Device-specific notifications..................1351 15.4 Querying notifications.................... 1353 15.5 Resolving network connection failures..............1354 15.6 Resolving errors during internal adjustments.............
  • Page 17 ® Contents R&S SMW200A B Elements and controls of the graphical user interface....1389 Elements in the status bar..................1389 Elements in the block diagram................1391 Elements in the task bar..................1393 Status information displayed in the info line............1395 Elements displayed for interactions..............1396 Naming conventions in the user interface............1404 Unit shortcuts......................1406 C Available user files and file extensions.........
  • Page 18 ® Contents R&S SMW200A User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...

  • Page 19: Safety And Regulatory Information

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S SMW200A Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the following chapters. Intended use The product generates radio frequency (RF) signals for the development, production and verification of electronic components, modules or devices.
  • Page 20 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S SMW200A Safety instructions Reconfigure or adjust the product only as described in the product documentation or the specifications document. Any other modifications can affect safety and are not per- mitted. Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by Rohde &...
  • Page 21 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S SMW200A Safety instructions Connecting the product Before connecting the interfaces and measuring inputs of the product to other products or electrical circuits, make sure that the other products or electrical circuits provide special protection against electric shock. This protection principle is referred to as SELV (safety extra-low voltage) and is based on a low voltage level and increased insulation.

  • Page 22: Labels On R&S Smw200A

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S SMW200A Warning messages in the documentation Electrical hazard Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Hot surface Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire. Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground.

  • Page 23: Where To Find Key Documents On Rohde & Schwarz

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S SMW200A Korea certification class B 1.4 Where to find key documents on Rohde & Schwarz Certificates issued to Rohde & Schwarz that are relevant for your country are provided at www.rohde-schwarz.com/key-documents, e.g. concerning: ● Quality management ●...

  • Page 24: Welcome To The R&S Smw200A

    ® Welcome to the R&S SMW200A R&S SMW200A What's new 2 Welcome to the R&S SMW200A The R&S SMW200A is a new high-performance vector signal generator developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering excellent signal characteristics, wide signal bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation, the R&S SMW200A makes signal generation fast and easy.

  • Page 25: Documentation Overview

    ® Welcome to the R&S SMW200A R&S SMW200A Documentation overview Compared to the previous version, it provides the new features listed below: ● In ARB mode, additional support for loading and playing *iq.tar, *.csv and ® MATLAB *.mat file formats, see Chapter 5.7.2.1, "About ARB file formats", on page 315.

  • Page 26: Service Manual

    ® Welcome to the R&S SMW200A R&S SMW200A Documentation overview 2.3.4 Service manual Describes the performance test for checking compliance with rated specifications, firm- ware update, troubleshooting, adjustments, installing options and maintenance. The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS): https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com 2.3.5 Instrument security procedures...

  • Page 27: Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, Etc

    ® Welcome to the R&S SMW200A R&S SMW200A Scope and content 2.3.10 Application notes, application cards, white papers, etc. These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu- lar topics. www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/smw200a For some application sheets, see also: www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/smw200a 2.3.11 Videos Find various videos on Rohde &...
  • Page 28 ® Welcome to the R&S SMW200A R&S SMW200A Scope and content Differences to instruments with the former RF hardware are referred to as earlier RF hardware versions. Appendix: RF Hardware Versions, on page 1421. User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...

  • Page 29: Getting Started

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use 3 Getting started 3.1 Preparing for use Here, you can find basic information about setting up the product for the first time. 3.1.1 Lifting and carrying For safety information, see "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 20.

  • Page 30: Setting Up The R&S Smw200A

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use – Residential environments – Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings ● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi- ated disturbances.
  • Page 31 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use Left = Stacked correctly, same dimensions Middle = Stacked correctly, different dimensions Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products 4. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity to provide sufficient airflow and ventilation.

  • Page 32: Considerations For Test Setup

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use 5. Tighten all screws at the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure the R&S SMW200A in the rack. To unmount the R&S SMW200A from a rack 1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets. 2.

  • Page 33: Connecting To Power

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage: a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground. b) Use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination. 3.1.6 Connecting to power For safety information, see "Connecting to power"...

  • Page 34: Connecting Usb Devices

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use See also Chapter 13.7, "To configure the instrument for remote access", on page 864. 3.1.8 Connecting USB devices You can connect or disconnect all USB devices from the R&S SMW200A during opera- tion.

  • Page 35: Connecting To Rf Coaxial Connectors

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use 3.1.9 Connecting to RF coaxial connectors Here, you find information on how to prepare and to connect to RF coaxial connectors of the R&S SMW200A. Use these RF connectors, for example, for output of the RF signal or for input of an external reference signal.

  • Page 36: Connecting To Rf A/Rf B

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use Connector Torque limit Nut opening 2.92 mm 5/16 RF A/RF B* 1.85 mm 5/16 RF A/RF B* (N) ≤ 7 GHz, f maximum frequency f depends on the connector type: f (2.92 mm) ≤...

  • Page 37: Connecting To Ref In/Ref Out

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use 3.1.12 Connecting to REF IN/REF OUT For connection, the R&S SMW200A provides BNC connectors or SMA connectors on the rear panel. See "To connect to pluggable connectors" on page 36 and "To connect to screwable connectors"...

  • Page 38: Switching On Or Off

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Preparing for use The interface supports a maximum bandwidth of up to 50 Gsample/s with active optical cables. See also: ● Chapter 4.6, "Digital baseband input settings", on page 161. ● Chapter 4.7, "I/Q digital output settings", on page 175.

  • Page 39: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour To shut down the product The product is in the ready state. ► Press the [On/Standby] key. The operating system shuts down. The LED changes to yellow. In the standby state, the power switch circuits and the OCXO are active. To deactivate them, disconnect the instrument from the power supply.
  • Page 40 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Figure 3-2: R&S SMW200A front panel controls and connectors Utility keys Touchscreen Function keys Keypad Navigation controls I/Q, I/Q Bar RF A/RF B SENSOR USER x USB, page 45 10 = On/Standby key, page 42 3.2.1.1 Touchscreen The block diagram and the most important settings are displayed on the screen on the...
  • Page 41 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Figure 3-3: Touchscreen elements 1 = Status bar (frequency and level display) 2 = Block diagram 3 = Taskbar/softkey bar Any user interface elements that react to a click by a mouse pointer also react to a tap on the screen, and vice versa.
  • Page 42 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour For more information, see Chapter 12, "General instrument functions", on page 739. Table 3-3: Utility keys Utility key Assigned functions [PRESET] Sets the instrument to a defined state [SAVE/RCL] Saves and loads instrument setting Accesses the file manager [LOCAL] Switches from remote control to local (manual) control...

  • Page 43: Navigation Controls

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Keypad The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters, including the corresponding units. It contains the following keys: Table 3-5: Keys on the keypad Type of key Description Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes. Decimal point Inserts a decimal point "."...

  • Page 44: Navigation Keys

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Navigation keys The navigation keys can be used alternatively to the rotary knob to navigate through dialog boxes, diagrams, or tables. Table 3-6: Navigation keys Type of key Description [Up/Down] key The [Up] and the [Down] key does the following: ●...
  • Page 45 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour How to: ● "To apply an external analog signal directly to the I/Q modulator" on page 223 ● "To apply an external differential analog signal directly to the I/Q modulator" on page 223 Two female USB (universal serial bus) 2.0 connectors of type A (host USB).

  • Page 46: Rear Panel Tour

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Table 3-9: Frequency options, connector types and frequency ranges Frequency option Connector type Frequency range ≤ 7.5 GHz RF A: R&S SMW-B1003/-B1006/-B1007 N female RF B: R&S SMW-B2003/-B2006/-B2007 ≤ 40 GHz RF A: 2.92 mm female ●...
  • Page 47 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Connectors for multi-purpose RF signals and remote control Processing board connectors and power supply Instrument boards R&S SMW-B10/-B13T/-B14 (standard baseband) Instrument boards R&S SMW-B9/-B13XT/-B15 (wideband baseband) Figure 3-5: Connectors for multi-purpose RF signals and remote control = Connectors for rack use: RF A/RF B 2, 3 =...
  • Page 48 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour BBMM Figure 3-7: Instrument boards R&S SMW-B10/-B13T/-B14 (standard baseband) 1, 5, 14 = Board designation (CODER, FADER, BBMM) 2, 4, 6, 8 T/M/C 3, 7, 10, 12 = DIG I/Q 9, 11 I/Q, I/Q Bar EXT 1/2 BBMM Figure 3-8: Instrument boards R&S SMW-B9/-B13XT/-B15 (wideband baseband)
  • Page 49 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour 3.2.2.1 Connectors Rear panel I/Q input connectors, recommended for use of the instrument in a 19" rack. "I/Q, I/Q Bar" on page 44. How to: ● Chapter 3.1.4.2, "Mounting the R&S SMW200A in a rack", on page 31 ●...
  • Page 50 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour BNC connector for input of an EFC (external frequency control) signal for electronic tuning of the internal reference frequency. Chapter 8.8, "Reference oscillator", on page 496. LO IN/LO OUT Option: R&S SMW-B90 SMA connector for local oscillator input and output for phase-coherent RF signal: ●...
  • Page 51 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Display Port, HDMI Provided for future use. T/M/C BNC multipurpose input/output trigger/marker/clock connectors. The number of connectors depends on the installed baseband options: ● Standard baseband generator (R&S SMW-B10): One T/M/C and two T/M connectors per board. ●...
  • Page 52 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour Table 3-13: Overview of the DIG I/Q interfaces and the required options Location Designation Required option CODER boards CODER 1/2 In R&S SMW-B10, standard baseband generator R&S SMW-B9, wideband baseband generator, if "System Config >...
  • Page 53 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument tour ● I/Q Bar connectors: Negative differential output of analog I/Q signals The number of connectors depends on the installed baseband options: ● Standard baseband (R&S SMW-B10 and R&S SMW-B13T) Two single-ended analog and two differential outputs. Output of differential signal requires option R&S SMW-K16.

  • Page 54: Trying Out The Instrument

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 3.3 Trying out the instrument This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R&S SMW200A step by step. The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the R&S SMW200A user manual. Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 3.5, "Instrument control",...
  • Page 55 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 2. Set the frequency: a) On the "Status Bar", tap the "A Freq" field. b) On the on-screen keypad, enter 1.955 g. The on-screen keypad closes and the status bar displays the frequency of 1.955 GHz.
  • Page 56 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Figure 3-9: Block diagram: Generating an unmodulated signal Tip: Alternative way to access the instrument functions. To fulfill the same task, you can use other hot spots in the block diagram, the provided functions under the "RF" block or the function front panel keys.

  • Page 57: Generating A Digitally Modulated Signal

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument To enable signal generation, enable the "RF On". ● Use the [FREQ], [LEVEL], and [RF ON/OFF] key on the front panel. See also Chapter 3.5, "Instrument control", on page 92. The RF A connector on the front panel of the R&S SMW200A outputs the 1.955 GHz signal.
  • Page 58 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument The "Custom Digital Modulation" dialog opens. 2. In the "Custom Digital Modulation" dialog, select "General > Set acc to standard > WCDMA-3GPP". 3. Select "General > State > On" to enable signal generation. 4.

  • Page 59: Triggering The Instrument Externally

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Figure 3-11: Display of the used modulation type The instrument activates automatically "I/Q Mod A", uses the internal trigger and clock signals, and generates a WCDMA-3GPP signal, modulated with a QPSK 45° offset modulation.
  • Page 60 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument an exact generation start time. A defined trigger event starts signal generation, e.g. when triggering the instrument internally or externally from the DUT. This example illustrates the general principle of external triggering and extends the configuration performed in Chapter 3.3.2, "Generating a digitally modulated signal",...
  • Page 61 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument The instrument uses its internal trigger and clock signals, and the default mapping of the marker signals to the connectors. 2. To access the related connector settings, perform one of the following: ●...
  • Page 62 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Figure 3-13: Signal mapping to the global connectors The "Global Connectors" dialog displays the current connectors configuration. The settings are configurable, but in this example we use the default mapping. 3. Alternatively, select "Block Diagram > Baseband > Misc > Custom Digital Mod", select the ">...
  • Page 63 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument To reconfigure the trigger settings We assume that the instrument is configured as described in Chapter 3.3.2, "Generat- ing a digitally modulated signal", on page 57 and the default connector mapping is maintained (see Figure 3-13).
  • Page 64 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Figure 3-14: Simplified representation of a test setup** ** = The figure depicts the cabling as a general principle; a particular test setup does not require all con- nections at the same time. Figure 3-14 depicts the location of the connectors and explains the connection as principle.

  • Page 65: Working With Marker Signals

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 2. Use suitable cables to connect the RF A/B REF OUT connectors of the R&S SMW200A to the signal analyzer or the DUT. Upon the receiving of an external trigger event, the R&S SMW200A starts the sig- nal generation and then generates a continuous signal.

  • Page 66: Routing A Baseband Signal To The Outputs

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument In this example, we use the global USER connectors. Alternatively, you can achieve the same configuration goal with the local T/M/C connectors. ® This test setup requires one oscilloscope, like the R&S RTO, as additional equipment.
  • Page 67 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument generated stream and define the output connector. The initial situation is the configura- tion described in Chapter 3.3.3, "Triggering the instrument externally", on page 59. The minimum requirement for the instrument in this example is an R&S SMW200A equipped with the options 2xR&S SMW-B10, R&S SMW-B13T, and R&S SMW- B1003/-B2003.
  • Page 68 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 3. In the block diagram, select "Baseband B > Misc > Custom Digital Mod...", select "Set acc. to standard > 3GPP FDD" and enable "Custom Digital Modulation > State > On". 4.
  • Page 69 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument The symbols in the block diagram confirm that the signals are added weighted with a frequency offset on both paths and a path gain on path B. Figure 3-16: Block diagram: Generating a composed signal (stream A) To enable simultaneous signal generation in both basebands, the R&S SMW200A couples the trigger settings in the available basebands.
  • Page 70 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Stream A is routed to all the available output connectors: the analog RF A and I/Q ("I/Q OUT 1") connectors, and the digital I/Q output connectors DIG I/Q ("BBMM1"). 2. To reconfigure the mapping, tap a matrix entry, for example disable the output of stream A on the BBMM 1 interface.

  • Page 71: Verifying The Generated Signal

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument To learn more and to explore the whole range of routing capability, refer to Chapter 4, "Signal routing and system configuration", on page 108. 3.3.6 Verifying the generated signal It is often useful to check the spectra of the configured signals, before you enable the RF output of the instrument.
  • Page 72 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument A new thumbnail (minimized view) indicating the active diagram appears in the "Taskbar". 4. Press the thumbnail graphic. The graphic enlarges and the diagram is displayed in a normal size. The "Power Spectrum" displays two signals, both 3GPP FDD signals are frequency shifted and the right one is also attenuated.

  • Page 73: Saving And Recalling Settings

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 6. In the "Power Spectrum" dialog, select "Configure" to return to the "Graphics Con- figuration" dialog. Close the "Graphics Configuration" dialog. This action has no effect on the configured graphics but on the dialog itself. The block diagram displays the current signal routing.
  • Page 74 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 3. Tap the "Save" button. The file MyTestSignal.savrcltxt is saved in the default directory /var/user. To load saved instrument settings You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file. 1.

  • Page 75: Generating An Eutra/Lte Signal

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Try out the following: ● Tap and hold on an empty space in the block diagram to access the context-sensi- tive menu. ● Select "Mark all parameters changed from preset". ● All changed parameters are highlighted.
  • Page 76 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument EUTRA/LTE to introduce the way you can access and interact with the instrument and experience the advantages provided by the additional options. The minimum requirement for R&S SMW200A in this example is a base unit equipped with the additional option R&S SMW-K55 EUTRA/LTE.
  • Page 77 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument The test models conform with various EUTRA test models (E-TM). A standard "File Select" function enables you to select from files with predefined settings. Tip: On the front panel, press the [HELP] key to retrieve detailed information on the current settings and on the contents of the predefined files.

  • Page 78: Enabling Mimo Configuration

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument Select "RF A > On". The instrument generates an EUTRA/LTE test signal with the selected channel bandwidth, frequency, and level. With these first steps, you have gained an impression of the provided functionality. For a comprehensive description of the full range of capabilities, refer to the user man- ual "EUTRA/LTE digital standard for R&S SMW200A".
  • Page 79 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument To learn more and to explore the whole range of capability provided by the "System Configuration" function, in particular how to connect and configure external devices, refer to Chapter 4, "Signal routing and system configuration", on page 108.
  • Page 80 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument b) In the block diagram, select "Fading > MIMO > System Configuration" c) In the block diagram, select "I/Q Stream Mapper" and select the "Fading/Base- band Configuration" tab. The "System Configuration > Fading/Baseband Configuration" dialog displays the current signal routing.
  • Page 81 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 1 = Standard or advanced mode; the last is required for configuration of complex LxMxN MIMO scenar- 2 = Simplified preview diagram with a description of the common application for the particular configura- tion 2.
  • Page 82 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Trying out the instrument 2. Leave all further settings, i.e. the "I/Q Stream Mapper" settings, at their default val- ues and close the "System Configuration" dialog. The block diagram displays the selected configuration. To generate a 2x2 MIMO EUTRA/LTE signal 1.

  • Page 83: System Overview

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview 4. In the block diagram, select "RF A > On" and "RF B > On". The R&S SMW200A generates a realistic EUTRA/LTE downlink signal with 10 MHz channel bandwidth, though without any scheduled data. To enable the generation of scheduled data, further configurations are required;...
  • Page 84 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview RF paths can be equipped with one of the available frequency options with different upper frequency limit. The baseband section of the R&S SMW200A is fully digital. It contains the hardware for generating and processing real-time I/Q signals or generat- ing signals with an arbitrary waveform generator.
  • Page 85 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview Figure 3-19: Block diagram of a fully equipped two-path instrument (default) – The block diagram depicting a 4x4 MIMO scenario with coupled baseband sources is a more abstract representation. Each stage of the signal generation is still represented by a functional block but the signal routing is displayed in a conceptional manner.
  • Page 86 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview Table 3-15: Required options per functional block (excerpt) Functional block Required option "Baseband A" R&S SMW-B10 "Baseband B" Second option R&S SMW-B10 "BB Input A" Included in R&S SMW-B10 "BB Input B" Included in second option R&S SMW-B10 "Fading A"...
  • Page 87 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview 3.4.1.3 Digital I/Q input and output (BB Input, I/Q Digital blocks) The "BB Input" and the "I/Q Digital" blocks are the access points to the settings of the digital interfaces. The R&S SMW200A is - depending on SW and HW options - able to receive digital baseband signals and to output digital baseband signals.

  • Page 88: Applications Examples Of The R&S Smw200A

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview 3.4.1.6 I/Q Stream Mapper block As one of the access points to the system configuration settings, the "I/Q Stream Map- per" provides direct access for configuring the distribution and mapping of the gener- ated I/Q streams to the available output connectors, to the analog RF and I/Q output and to the digital I/Q output connectors.
  • Page 89 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview The R&S SMW200A enables you to generate test signals in a versatile MIMO con- figuration for which several signal generators were previously required. ● Generation of a wanted signal and an interference signal for receiver tests ●...
  • Page 90 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview 3.4.2.3 WCDMA test signal for handover (two cells) The block diagram in this example depicts the generation of a test signal using both internal baseband generators and both RF outputs, for example for handover tests. The R&S SMW200A acts as two independent generators in one instrument.
  • Page 91 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A System overview 3.4.2.5 EUTRA/LTE test signal with CA and 2x2 MIMO The block diagram in this example depicts the generation of an EUTRA/LTE test signal with carrier aggregation (CA), for example for UE tests. This signal provides two com- ponent carriers (intra-band carrier aggregation) and 2x2 MIMO fading for each carrier.

  • Page 92: Instrument Control

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control 3.5 Instrument control This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R&S SMW200A. It covers the following topics: ● Possible ways to operate the instrument..............92 ● Means of manual interaction...................

  • Page 93: Means Of Manual Interaction

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control Remote monitoring and control of the instrument from a connected computer is based on the common cross-platform technology VNC (Virtual Network Comput- ing). On the remote computer, any standard web browser (supporting Java) or a dedicated VNC client (like Ultr@VNC) can be used.

  • Page 94: Understanding The Display Information

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control ● Using a key on the instrument or on a keyboard 3.5.3 Understanding the display information The block diagram of the R&S SMW200A displays all main settings and generator states, divided into main operation areas. Figure 3-21: Block diagram 1 = Status bar 2 = Block diagram...

  • Page 95: Block Diagram

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control 1 = Frequency display 2 = Status buttons 3 = Level display The status buttons indicate key parameters that are set for the output signal. Most of the status buttons are virtual keys that you can use to open a corresponding menu or dialog.
  • Page 96 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control Legend Item Description Connector icons Represent the interfaces for signal input and output: ● Digital I/Q signal connector input (1) ● Analog I/Q signal connector input (9) ● RF signal connector output (12) Icons vary depending on the frequency.

  • Page 97: Additional Display Characteristics

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control Figure 3-23: Taskbar fully assigned 1 = System configuration 2 = Remote control connections 3 = R&S NRP power sensors 4 = Graphics 5 = Dialogs 6 = Diagram / more System Config Provides access to general system configurations like setup, display, or remote.
  • Page 98 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control The "Info line" shows brief status information and error messages. It appears when an event generates a message. If selected, the R&S SMW200A shows information on static errors and the error history. ● Key parameters indicated in tab labels Most dialogs are divided into tabs with logically grouped parameters.

  • Page 99: Accessing The Functionality

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control 3.5.4 Accessing the functionality All functionalities are provided in dialog boxes as known from computer programs. You can control the instrument intuitively with the touchscreen. This section provides an overview of the accessing methods. The instrument's functions and settings can be accessed by selecting one of the follow- ing elements: ●...

  • Page 100: Entering Data

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control To close a dialog box To close a dialog box, you have the same controls as you know from computers or devices with touchscreen. ► Perform one of the following actions: ● Tap the "Close" icon in the upper right corner. ●...
  • Page 101 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control To abort the entry ► Press the [ESC] key. The dialog box closes without changing the settings. 3.5.5.1 Entering numeric parameters To enter values with the on-screen keypad For numeric settings, the instrument displays the numeric keypad. The units specified correspond to the units of the parameter.

  • Page 102: Getting Information And Help

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control "Redo" restores a previously undone action. 3.5.6 Getting information and help In some dialog boxes, graphics are included to explain the way a setting works. For further information, you can use the following sources: ●...
  • Page 103 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box covers two main areas: ● "Contents" - contains a table of help contents ● "Topic" - contains a specific help topic The help system also provides an "Index" and a "Find" area, and "Zoom" functions that are accessed via the corresponding buttons.
  • Page 104 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control 6. To maximize the "Topics" area, tap the "Hide Contents Tree" button to hide the con- tents tree. Using the index 1. Select the "Index" button. 2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in. The entries starting with these characters are displayed.
  • Page 105 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control 4. Tap on a tutorial from the list and confirm with "Select". If the file contains a description, it is displayed. User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...
  • Page 106 ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control 5. Use the default mode, that is "Execution Mode > Interactive". 6. Tap on the "Start" button. 7. Observe the information displayed in the "Info" line (bottom of the display). 1 = Information on the performed action 2 = Progress bar 3 = "Next Step": confirms the execution of the step 4 = "Stop": terminates the tutorial...

  • Page 107: Remote Control

    ® Getting started R&S SMW200A Instrument control See also: ● Chapter E, "Available tutorial files", on page 1413 ● The application sheet "RS_SMW_CreatingTutorials_AppSheet", available for download from the R&S website, on the R&S SMW200A product page. 3.5.7 Remote control In addition to working with the R&S SMW200A interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC.

  • Page 108: Signal Routing And System Configuration

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Working with the system configuration function 4 Signal routing and system configuration The R&S SMW200A provides multiple routing possibilities and simplifies the definition of versatile MIMO configurations. Provided the instrument is equipped with the required options, R&S SMW200A can: ●...

  • Page 109: Test Scenario And Required System Configuration

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Working with the system configuration function General workflow The general workflow comprises the main phases listed bellow. The "System Configu- ration" helps you in phase 3, 4 and 5. 1. Analyzing the use case/test case and deciding whether the test setup requires external instruments, either as a baseband source or as an RF frontend.
  • Page 110 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Working with the system configuration function <#Entity>x<#Basebands>x<#Streams> (LxMxN). The last two blocks are identi- cal with the standard convention used to describe a MxN MIMO system. Example: The abbreviation 1x8x2 is a representation of a one-entity 8x2 MIMO system; a 2x2x2 configuration is a scenario with two entities with a 2x2 MIMO system each.
  • Page 111 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Working with the system configuration function Test scenario Description LxMxN Baseband sources Output signals All instruments Intra-band Intra-band LTE-A carrier UE test with two component 2x2x2 Coupled sources ● ● RF A, RF B aggregation with carriers (carrier aggregation) R&S SMW20...
  • Page 112 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Working with the system configuration function Test scenario Description LxMxN Baseband sources Output signals All instruments ● ● RF A, RF B WLAN 802.11ac WLAN 802.11ac with 80 MHz 1x3x3 Coupled sources ●...

  • Page 113: Possible Ways To Configure The Signal Flow

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Possible ways to configure the signal flow Table 4-2: Scenarios for signaling tests Test scenario Description LxMxN Baseband sources Input/output signals All instruments LTE-A carrier UE test with two component 2x2x2 Coupled sources Input: CODER 1/2 1x R&S CMW aggregation with...

  • Page 114: Using The System Configuration Capabilities

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Possible ways to configure the signal flow Drag&Drop blocks Basically, this functionality achieves the same effect as the signal routing settings but extends it. It adds the possibility to route the generated streams to any of the digital and analog output connectors of the instrument.
  • Page 115 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Possible ways to configure the signal flow after executing the "Apply" function; the configuration influences the signal flow up to the I/Q stream mapper. See section Chapter 4.4, "System configuration settings", on page 126, for a detailed description of the provided settings.

  • Page 116: Overview Of The Signals And Interfaces

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces External RF and I/Q instruments The MIMO test scenarios with more than two RX antennas require the signal at both RF outputs and up to six additional RF signals. The instrument generates the required signal and routes it to the available output connectors as defined with one of the rout- ing possibilities.

  • Page 117: Physical Location Of The Input And Output Interfaces

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces ● Chapter 4.3.5, "Important signal parameters and interface characteristics", on page 121 4.3.1 Physical location of the input and output interfaces This section focuses on the input and output interfaces of the instrument. For a detailed overview of all front and rear panel connectors, see Chapter 3.2, "Instrument tour",...
  • Page 118 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces Figure 4-2: Wideband baseband instrument rear panel: Digital input and output interfaces ● The figures Figure 4-3 Figure 4-4 show the analog output interfaces on the rear panel for a fully equipped standard baseband instrument and a wideband baseband instrument.

  • Page 119: Overview Of The Baseband Signal Sources

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces Indication of the digital interface status A dedicated LED indicates the connector status: ● green: an input connector ● yellow: an output connector ● no light / gray: the connector is not active 4.3.2 Overview of the baseband signal sources The table Table 4-3...

  • Page 120: Overview Of The Baseband And Rf Output Signals

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces ● R&S EX-IQ-BOX external digital signal interface module ● R&S FSW signal and spectrum analyzer in radar echo generation applications ● R&S CMW500 radio communication tester in fading applications See also: ●...

  • Page 121: Supported Digital Interfaces And System Configuration

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces Table 4-4: Physical output signals and GUI elements Output Signal Output connec- GUI element Related descriptions "RF" Chapter 8, "Configuring the RF sig- nal", on page 480 Digital I/Q BBMM x "I/Q Digital"...
  • Page 122 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces Sample rate The sample rate of the digital input and output signal can be defined manually or auto- matically retrieved from the input and estimated for the output signal. The bandwidth and thus the sample rate of the digital input signal is not limited by the installed sample rate options.
  • Page 123 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces Where to find the necessary values ● Dialog "BB Input" Chapter 4.6, "Digital baseband input settings", on page 161 ● Dialog "Digital I/Q Out" Chapter 4.7, "I/Q digital output settings", on page 175 ●...
  • Page 124 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces Signal processing prerequisites for external baseband signals This section focuses on the way that these requirements are fulfilled and explains how the instrument deals with signals deviating from the expected values: ●...
  • Page 125 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Overview of the signals and interfaces The internal signal processing in the Standard baseband is based on a sample rate with a maximum value (f = 200 MHz or 100 MHz) that depends on sample, max the capabilities of the connected transmitting/receiving device.

  • Page 126: System Configuration Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Where: ● is the output voltage, see "I/Q Level Vp (EMF)" on page 191. ● is the bias voltage, see "Bias (EMF)" on page 192. bias ● is the offset between inverting and non-inverting output, see "Offset (EMF)"...

  • Page 127: Fading And Baseband Configuration Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Settings: ● Fading and baseband configuration settings............127 ● I/Q stream mapper settings...................135 ● External RF and I/Q settings................. 137 ● External instrument configuration settings............145 ● Overview....................... 155 4.4.1 Fading and baseband configuration settings Access: ►...
  • Page 128 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings > "Standard" this behavior is assured, for higher MIMO modes in "Mode" > "Advanced" the block diagram is an abstract representation of the configuration. This section focuses on the settings available in the "System Configuration" dialog. For further details about the fading functionality, refer to the user manual "Fading Simu- lator".
  • Page 129 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings "Radar Echo Generation (REG)" Requires R&S SMW-K78. Enables the R&S SMW200A to work as a radar echo generator. The fading simulator is disabled. ® See user manual R&S SMW-K78 Radar Echo Generation. "GNSS Advanced"...
  • Page 130 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Baseband gener- Mode Signal Out- Description Options ator puts Advanced "Digital Only R&S SMW200A can process up to 4 multiplexed streams R&S SMW- Multiplexed" received over the same connector. With options R&S SMW-B10 and R&S SMW-K551, the R&S SMW200A can also generate digital signals with reduced speed, depending on the device connected to the digital I/Q...
  • Page 131 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings For more information, refer to the specifications document. Entities (Users, Cells) ← System Configuration LxMxN Defines the number of entities to be generated. An entity is a self-contained independent system, consisting of its own baseband part with possible fading simulator and noise generator and an RF part.
  • Page 132 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Remote command: on page 985 :SCONfiguration:FADing Streams (Rx Antennas) ← System Configuration LxMxN Defines the number of streams or Rx antennas to be generated per entity. If one entity is enabled, the R&S SMW200A can generate the signal of up to 8 Rx antennas simul- taneously (see Table...
  • Page 133 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings CA Bandwidth Option: R&S SMW-B15/-K822/-K823 Indicates the resulting channel aggregation (CA) bandwidth, calculated based on the MIMO configuration and the "BB Bandwidth". The "CA Bandwidth" represents the signal bandwidth at the stream mapper. For more information, refer to the specifications document.
  • Page 134 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings This feature is useful, if your test setup requires a combination of max 4 signals with real-time data source and 4 ARB signals. For example, for performing GSM AM sup- pression tests according to 3GPP TS 51.021, chapter 8.

  • Page 135: I/Q Stream Mapper Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings 4.4.2 I/Q stream mapper settings Access: ► In the block diagram, select "I/Q Stream Mapper". Figure 4-7: I/Q Stream Mapper settings in a LxMxN configuration with four streams (standard baseband) The dialog provides the settings for routing of the signal streams to the available output connectors, the analog RF and I/Q output, and the digital I/Q output connec-...
  • Page 136 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings , MHz offset Option: R&S SMW-B9 - available if "Signal Outputs = Analog Only" Sets an absolute frequency offset; streams routed to the RF, I/Q and BBMM connec- tors are shifted in the frequency domain. Frequency offset is also applied to R&S SMBV and R&S SGT instruments connected to the FADER outputs.

  • Page 137: External Rf And I/Q Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM<ch>:STReam<st>:STATe on page 990 :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:FADer<ch>:STReam<st>:STATe on page 990 :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM<ch>:CHANnel<di>:STReam<st>: on page 990 STATe Combination Mode Defines the way that the streams are internally processed if multiple streams are routed to the same physical connector. Tip: Use the parameter , MHz to shift the frequency bands of the streams in the...
  • Page 138 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Signal Interface Remark Control LAN or USB The control connection is enabled. Input Analog I/Q or digital I/Q The physical input signal or output signal is present at the interface. Output Analog I/Q, digital I/Q or RF Reference...
  • Page 139 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Settings: Display........................139 Auto Connect......................139 Connect/Disconnect All Remote................. 139 Preset behavior: Keep connections to external instruments........140 Connector Name......................140 Direction........................141 External Instrument..................... 142 Connection......................142 Remote Connection Status..................

  • Page 140: Preset Behavior: Keep Connections To External Instruments

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings You can toggle the remote connection status with the parameter "Rem Conn". Note: Disconnecting the remote connection to an R&S SZU presets several RF param- eters of the R&S SMW200A to their default value. This preset applies in particular to the RF frequency and RF level;...

  • Page 141: Direction

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings See also: ● Chapter 4.3.1, "Physical location of the input and output interfaces", on page 117 ● Chapter 4.4.1, "Fading and baseband configuration settings", on page 127 ● Chapter 4.3.4, "Supported digital interfaces and system configuration", on page 121 Remote command:...

  • Page 142: External Instrument

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Connector Direction/ Enabled in the "Fading and Base- Enabled in the "I/Q Color band Configuration" Stream Mapping" Not used Not used Not used Not used Remote command: on page 995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:DIRection? on page 995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:DIRection?
  • Page 143 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Remote command: on page 996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? on page 996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? on page 996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? Remote Connection Status Indicates the status of the remote connection. Click the status indicator to toggle the remote connection status.
  • Page 144 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings on page 996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput<ch>:INAMe? on page 1003 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput<ch>:REMote:INFO? on page 996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:RF<ch>:INAMe? on page 1003 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:RF<ch>:REMote:INFO? RF Couple If enabled, this parameter couples all major RF setting (like the "RF Frequency", the "RF Level"...

  • Page 145: External Instrument Configuration Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings RF State With enabled "RF Coupled" parameter, displays the RF output state of the connected external instrument. The parameter is coupled to the state of the RF output of the R&S SMW200A.
  • Page 146 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings 2. Select "Remote Instrument". The tab provides settings to configure the connection settings of the remote instru- ment. Settings: Detect..........................146 Scan..........................147 Clean Unused/Clean All....................147 External Instrument..................... 147 Set Symbolic Name.....................148 Remote...

  • Page 147: Scan

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Note: The first initialization of a connection to an external instrument can last several minutes. During the initialization procedure, you cannot search for the external instru- ment. Remote command: on page 1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:DETect? on page 1001...

  • Page 148: Set Symbolic Name

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings ● Select "Select Instrument", navigate trough the pool of available instruments, and select the required. The required settings are retrieved and updated automatically. Select "None" to disable the connection. Execute "Apply"...

  • Page 149: Hostname Or Ip Address

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings "Frontend Connection" Fixed remote channel for control of external frontends via the LAN interface. Remote command: on page 1000 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:ADD on page 1002 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:INFO? on page 1002 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:REMote:INFO? on page 1002 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:INFO? on page 1003 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput<ch>:REMote:INFO?

  • Page 150: Frontend Configuration

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings "Single-Ended" ● If "RF Envelope > Off" Single-ended output at the I/Q connectors. Option: R&S SMW-B9: the signal from "I/Q Analog B" is output at the I Bar connectors. Figure 4-3 Figure 4-4.
  • Page 151 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings See: – Example"Controlling multiple instruments with the same application program" on page 978 – Example"Connecting an external instrument and sending SCPI commands" on page 980 Remote command: :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:INITialization:CATalog? on page 1003 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:INITialization:FILE on page 1004 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:REMote:INITialization:FILE...
  • Page 152 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings 4.4.4.2 Remote control settings Access: 1. Select "External RF and I/Q" > "External Instrument" > "Config...". 2. Select "Remote Control". In this dialog, you can send individual SCPI commands or a sequence of SCPI commands to the connected instruments.
  • Page 153 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings Command/Send Command Entry field for the SCPI commands. You can enter a new command or select a previously sent command from the "His- tory". If the remote connection is active, select "Send Command" to execute the command. Remote command: on page 1004 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:SEND...

  • Page 154: Connections Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings 3. In the "<Dig. Conn. Name>: External Instrument Configuration" dialog, select "Show Connector". The dialog displays the location of the selected connector. The "Show Connector" function triggers the instrument to identify the connector on the rear panel.

  • Page 155: Overview

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings 2. In the "I/Q OUT x: External Instrument Configuration" dialog, select "Connections". The dialog is a graphical representation of the required connections and their sta- tus. The connection status indication is color coded. The dialog shows information on the following: ●...
  • Page 156 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A System configuration settings – LO coupling or used external reference frequency. – Connected external baseband source to the digital input interface. 1 = I/Q streams mapped to the interfaces. 2a = State indication for the RF and digital/analog IQ outputs: active 2b = State indication for the RF and digital/analog IQ outputs: inactive 3 = External instrument configured in the "External RF and I/Q"...

  • Page 157: Signal Routing Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Signal routing settings GUI element Dialog Refer to "FAD 1/2" Depends on the current Chapter 4.6, "Digital baseband input settings", configuration and on page 161 or the associated stream whether the digital inter- Chapter 4.7, "I/Q digital output settings", face acts as input or as...
  • Page 158 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Signal routing settings ● The external baseband signal of the first input module "BB Input A" can be fed into path A, path B or both ● The second baseband input module "BB Input B" is firmly connected to signal path ●...
  • Page 159 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Signal routing settings Example: Baseband and fading signal routing in standard mode Figure 4-8 shows an example of the signal flow for the following signal routing set- tings: ● "Baseband A > Signal Routing > route to path A and B" ●...
  • Page 160 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Signal routing settings Example: Routing the signal of baseband A to the RF B output Figure 4-9 shows an example of the signal flow for the following settings: ● "IQ Stream Mapper > Stream A to RF B" ●...

  • Page 161: Digital Baseband Input Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Signal Routing Requires R&S SMW-B10. Defines the way the baseband signal (internally generated or externally provided) is routed in the instrument. When routing more than one signal to the same path, the sig- nals are summed.

  • Page 162: Baseband Input Settings In The Standard Baseband Generator

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings For more information, refer to the specifications document. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.3, "SOURce:BBIN subsystem", on page 1035. ● Baseband input settings in the standard baseband generator......162 ●...
  • Page 163 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings The "Baseband Input Settings" dialog provides settings necessary to define the used connector, and to adjust the signal parameters, like the sample rate and the baseband input level. Figure 4-11: Example: Baseband Input Settings in 1x4x4 configuration (standard baseband) If the current instrument configuration uses Coupled...
  • Page 164 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Access: ► Select "BB Input" > "Digital I/Q In" > "Baseband Input Settings". Settings: State..........................164 Connector........................164 Swap........................164 Connected Device.......................165 State Enables the feeding of the selected external digital signals into the baseband. Remote command: on page 1037 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:STATe...
  • Page 165 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Connected Device If the connection to the external device is properly established and signal transmission is active, this parameter displays information on the instrument connected to the DIG I/Q interface: ●...
  • Page 166 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings "HS Digital I/Q In" Option: R&S SMW-B9 Estimates the sample rate value based on the information transmitted by the transmitter. Resulting value per channel is displayed by the parameter Sample Rate.
  • Page 167 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Crest Factor........................ 167 Peak Level........................167 Level..........................167 DIG IQ Auto Setting Activates an automatic adjustment of the baseband input signal. The R&S SMW200A receives peak level, level and crest factor values directly from the connected transmitter and recognizes changes automatically.
  • Page 168 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Remote command: on page 1044 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:POWer:RMS? 4.6.1.4 Signal monitoring settings Option: R&S SMW-B10 Access: ► Select "BB Input" > "Digital I/Q In" > "Baseband Input Settings" > "Signal Monitor". Settings: Signal Monitoring......................

  • Page 169: Baseband Input Settings In The Wideband Baseband Generator

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings "Overflow Hold" Indicates an overload since the last reset for evaluating the measure- ment. To reset the state, use one of the following: ● Select "Reset" ● Start a new measurement with the "Auto Level Set" function ●...
  • Page 170 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings The dialog provides settings necessary to define the used connector, and to config- ure signal parameters, like the sample rate and the baseband input level. In this dialog, you access the settings the HS DIG I/Q connector. You recognize the type of connector that is active by the used connector icon.
  • Page 171 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Settings: State..........................171 Connector........................171 Interface........................171 Sample Rate Source....................171 Connected Device.......................172 State Enables the feeding of the selected external digital signals into the baseband. Remote command: on page 1037 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:STATe Connector Defines the connector used as an external signal source.
  • Page 172 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings "Digital I/Q In" For CODER connectors: Estimates the sample rate based on the applied I/Q data clock and displays the resulting value in the value field. The I/Q data clock sig- nal is fed via the DIG I/Q input.
  • Page 173 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Figure 4-13: Signal Input settings in wideband baseband with separate BB sources Settings: Channel Table......................173 └ Number......................173 └ Name......................173 └ Sample Rate....................173 └ Crest Factor....................
  • Page 174 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A Digital baseband input settings Remote command: on page 1040 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:CHANnel<ch0>:SRATe Crest Factor ← Channel Table DIG IQ Auto Setting > "Off", sets the crest factor per channel. Remote command: on page 1039 [:SOURce<hw>]:BBIN:CHANnel<ch0>:POWer:CFACtor Peak Level ←...

  • Page 175: I/Q Digital Output Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings Measurement Period For CODER connectors: Sets the recording duration for measuring the baseband input signal by "Auto Level Set". Note: For accurate level measurements, set the measurement period to a time value that is long enough to capture several periods of the input signal.
  • Page 176 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings In the default instrument state (Standard mode), the block diagram displays the BBMM connectors in a folded state. The digital output interfaces are inactive (gray LEDs). Figure 4-14: Representation of the digital output interface DIG I/Q in standard mode 1 = mapped I/Q stream 2 = digital output interface state: gray = inactive;...
  • Page 177 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings 1 = digital output interface state: grey = all inactive 2 = more settings indication; select to unfold detailed information 3 = digital output interface state: half grey/blue = one interface active and one interface inactive 4 = digital output interface state: blue = all active 1.

  • Page 178: General Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings Figure 4-17: I/Q digital outputs: Understanding the displayed information (standard baseband) 1, 4 = State of the I/Q digital output = Digital output interface name = Mapped I/Q streams = Indicates the connected instrument and digital output interface = Side tabs: one tab per digital output Using the "I/Q Stream Mapper"...
  • Page 179 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings If an R&S SGT is connected to the DIG I/Q interface of the R&S SMW200A, several parameters set automatically. Settings: State..........................179 Show Connector......................179 Sample Rate....................... 179 └ Slow IQ State....................
  • Page 180 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings All digital outputs must work in the same mode, that is with "Slow IQ = On" or "Slow IQ = Off". You can change the state of any one of the outputs; the state of the other is set automatically.

  • Page 181: Channels Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings 4.7.2 Channels settings Option: R&S SMW-B9/-K19 Access: 1. Select "System Config > Fading/Baseband Config > Signal Outputs" = "Digital Only (HS)". 2. Set the number of channels per HS DIG I/Q interface, where the total number of channels on all interfaces cannot exceed eight.
  • Page 182 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings ● Common to all Channels > "Off", you can set the sample rate per channel individ- ually. ● Common to all Channels > "On", the value resembles the value set with the parameter Value.

  • Page 183: Signal Output Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings Active Activates the channel. Remote command: [:SOURce]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:BBMM<ch>:CHANnel<st0>:STATe on page 1231 Aggregated Link Sample Rate Indicates the aggregated sample rate and the maximum sample rate, where: ● The aggregated sample rate is the sum of the sample rates of all active channels. It cannot exceed the maximum sample rate.
  • Page 184 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings Signal Monitoring......................185 Power-On State......................186 Group Delay Compensation..................186 Signal output level settings Comprises the level settings of the digital IQ output signal. The signal level is expressed as a peak or RMS level value. If R&S SGT is connected to the DIG I/Q interface of the R&S SMW200A, the level parameters are set automatically.
  • Page 185 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q digital output settings Remote command: For the output signal at the DIG I/Q interfaces: on page 1227 [:SOURce]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:BBMM<ch>:POWer:LEVel on page 1227 [:SOURce]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:FADer<ch>:POWer:LEVel For the output signal of a channel of the HS DIG I/Q interfaces: [:SOURce]:IQ:OUTPut:DIGital:BBMM<ch>:CHANnel<st0>:POWer:LEVel on page 1227 User Variation...

  • Page 186: I/Q Analog Output Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings "Overflow Hold" Indicates an overload since last reset for evaluating the measure- ment. To reset the state, perform one of the following: ● Select "Reset". ● Start a new signal generation. ●...
  • Page 187 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings ● Option Differential Analog I/Q Outputs (R&S SMW-K16) per signal path ● Option Wideband Baseband Generator (R&S SMW-B9) per signal path and Option Wideband baseband main module two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13XT) Incl.
  • Page 188 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings The dialog comprises the settings for selecting the analog output signal type (sin- gle-ended or differential), enabling and generating an RF envelope signal, and add- ing digital impairments to the signal. 5.

  • Page 189: General Analog I/Q Output Settings

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings See user manual R&S SMW-K540, R&S SMW-K541 Envelope Tracking and AM/AM, AM/PM Predistortion. 4.8.1 General analog I/Q output settings Access: ► Select "I/Q Analog > I/Q Analog Outputs > General". For a description of the impairments settings, see Chapter 6.4, "Impairing the signal",...

  • Page 190: Rf Envelope

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings Remote command: on page 1218 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut[:ANALog]:PRESet Save/Recall Accesses the "Save/Recall" dialog, that is the standard instrument function for saving and recalling the complete dialog-related settings in a file. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.

  • Page 191: I/Q Level Vp (Emf)

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings "Single-Ended" ● If "RF Envelope > Off" Single-ended output at the I/Q connectors. Option: R&S SMW-B9: the signal from "I/Q Analog B" is output at the I Bar connectors. Figure 4-3 Figure 4-4.

  • Page 192: Couple I/Q Bias

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A I/Q analog output settings Remote command: on page 1220 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:LEVel Couple I/Q Bias Requires "Mode" > "Variable". If enabled, couples the bias setting of the I signal and the Q signal component. The bias of the I signal component is configurable, the bias of the Q signal component updates automatically to the same value.

  • Page 193: How To Connect External Instruments And Configure The Signal Flow

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Effect of a positive offset Effect of a negative offset A positive offset is set with half of the value in the A negative offset is set with half of the value in the positive direction at the non-inverting outputs, in the negative direction at the non-inverting outputs, in the...

  • Page 194: Finding Out The Suitable Configuration For Your Test Situation

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow ● Chapter 4.6, "Digital baseband input settings", on page 161 ● user manual "Fading Simulator" Figure 4-19: General configuration stages and the steps performed in the System Configuration dia- The illustration depicts the steps in general and is intended to explain the configuration in principle.

  • Page 195: How To Find Out Where The Input/Output Interface Is Located

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow ● Chapter 4.9.4, "How to route the I/Q streams to the output interfaces", on page 198 See also: ● Chapter 4.9.5, "How to cable the instruments in MIMO test setups", on page 199 ●...

  • Page 196: How To Define The Mimo Scenario

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow To find out the connector's direction The directions of the digital interfaces at the FADER boards are configurable parame- ter. Depending on the test setup, each of these connectors can serve as an input or an output connector but not at the same time.
  • Page 197 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow For example, to enable the instrument to calculate the required signals and streams out of one baseband signal source, select "BB Source Config > Coupled Sources"...

  • Page 198: How To Route The I/Q Streams To The Output Interfaces

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow To define the baseband signal To generate an EUTRA/LTE signal, use the following general steps: 1. Select "Baseband > EUTRA/LTE". 2. Configure the settings as required. For example, enable "EUTRA/LTE >...

  • Page 199: How To Cable The Instruments In Mimo Test Setups

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Tip: To route more streams to one output connector, in the"I/Q Stream Mapper" dialog and for the particular connector, select "Combination> Add" and select the streams to be routed to it.

  • Page 200: How To Connect And Configure External Instruments

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Figure 4-22: Example of test setup: 1x4x4 MIMO with R&S SMW200A and 2xR&S SGS connected to the I/Q OUT 1/2. Blue circle = front panel connector Gray circle = rear panel connector Refer to "To connect instruments to the I/Q analog interface"...
  • Page 201 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow To connect instruments to the I/Q analog interface In this example, we assume a "Fading/Baseband Configuration > 1x4x4 MIMO" and the following stream mapping: Stream A and stream B are output at RF A and B; stream C and D at I/Q OUT x respectively.
  • Page 202 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 8. Select "Apply". The "System Config > System Configuration > External RF und I/Q" dialog displays the settings of the connected external instrument. 9.
  • Page 203 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 12. In the "System Config > System Configuration > External RF und I/Q" dialog, select the "I/Q OUT 1 > Rem Conn" icon to toggle the state. This action establishes the remote connection to the instrument.
  • Page 204 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Figure 4-24: Example of test setup: 1x4x4 MIMO with R&S SMW200A and 2xR&S SGT connected to the BBMM1/2. Blue circle = front panel connector Gray circle = rear panel connector 2.
  • Page 205 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Figure 4-25: Example: Connecting external instruments to the BBMM 1/2 of theR&S SMW200A (2xR&S SGT) 3. In the block diagram, select "I/Q Digital". The dialog confirms the selected configuration.
  • Page 206 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow See also: ● Example"Controlling multiple instruments with the same application program" on page 978 ● Example"Connecting an external instrument and sending SCPI commands" on page 980 To connect and configure an R&S SZU The following example assumes a differential I/Q connection between the R&S SZU...
  • Page 207 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 4. Connect a USB cable to the USB connector and the USB Device connector of R&S SZU. 5. Connect the R&S SZU to the power supply. Note: Make sure that you keep the warm-up time.
  • Page 208 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow But if you change the "I/Q Output Type > Differential to Single Ended", or vice versa, the R&S SMW200A issues the following warning message: "SZU settings conflict: At least one adjustment is done in another mode than the SZU is currently set to (single-ended / differential).

  • Page 209: Connecting To Hs Dig I/Q Interfaces

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow = Active I/Q analog output, firmly routed to the R&S SZU; the example uses differential output signal = I/Q analog B is disabled, because the differential output of the first path is used 10 = R&S SMW200A RF settings 4.9.7 Connecting to HS DIG I/Q interfaces In a multi-instrument setup, you can use the R&S SMW200A as a primary instrument...
  • Page 210 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 1 = R&S SMW200A (primary instrument) 2 = R&S SMCV100B 1 (secondary instrument) 3 = R&S SMCV100B 2 (secondary instrument) Table 4-11: Signals and connections for R&S SMW200A/ R&S SMM100A as secondary instru- ments Signal R&S SMW200A...
  • Page 211 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow a) On the primary instrument R&S SMW200A, select "RF" > "Reference Fre- quency" > "Source" > "Internal". Chapter 8.8, "Reference oscillator", on page 496. b) On the secondary instruments, select "Reference Frequency"...
  • Page 212 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow e) Follow the same procedure for configuring the external instrument on "BBMM 2". 2. Check the status of the remote connection in the "Rem Conn" column. To configure the baseband trigger signal Configure the baseband signal as required for the particular test setup, for example: 1.
  • Page 213 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow The following step-by-step instruction provides an exemplary setup with the R&S SMCV100B as a secondary instrument. For other secondary instrument, the con- figuration is analogous.

  • Page 214: How To Generate A 2X8 Mimo Signal For Bs Tests

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 4. Select "System Configuration" > "External RF and I/Q". The secondary instrument displays an enabled connection to the primary instru- ment via the QSFP+ interfaces. 4.9.8 How to generate a 2x8 MIMO signal for BS tests Refer to Table 4-1...
  • Page 215 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Follow the instructions provided in the sections listed below but connect six R&S SGT instruments instead: 1. Connect all 8 instruments to a LAN. 2.

  • Page 216: How To Generate A 8X8 Mimo Signal With Two R&S Smw200A

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Figure 4-28: Example: Automatically configured settings in the connected external instrument All connected instruments generate signals with the same RF frequency. 4.9.9 How to generate a 8x8 MIMO signal with two R&S SMW200A Option: R&S SMW-K821 Refer to Table 4-1...
  • Page 217 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Figure 4-29: Example of test setup*: 8x8 MIMO with 2xR&S SMW200A and 4xR&S SGT blue circle = front panel connector gray circle = rear panel connector = To simplify the diagram, it does not show the LAN/USB connections between the instruments Workflow overview 1.
  • Page 218 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 4. Starting signal generation "To start signal generation" on page 220 To cable the instruments Refer to Figure 4-29 for illustration the required connections. The test setup does not show the LAN connections.
  • Page 219 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 3. Set "System Config. > Setup > Global Connectors" > "User 6 > Direction = Out- put". Set "User 6 > Signal = Manual Trigger". 4.

  • Page 220: How To Connect An R&S ® Cmw500 For Fading Applications

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow We use the configuration from the first instrument, hence "Trigger Source = External Global Trigger 1" is selected. The R&S SMW200A expects the "Global Trigger 1"...

  • Page 221: How To Apply An External Digital Baseband Signal

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow ® All connections between R&S SMW200A and the R&S CMW500 are established via the rear panels of the instruments. Figure 4-30: Example of test setup: 1x2x2 MIMO with 1xR&S SMW200A and 1xR&S CMW500 connec- ted to the DIG I/Q interfaces 4.9.11 How to apply an external digital baseband signal See:...
  • Page 222 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow Figure 4-31: Example of test setup (simplified, standard baseband) The procedure describes the configuration in the default state of the instrument, i.e. "System Config >...
  • Page 223 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 8. Select "Baseband Input Settings > General > State > On" to enable the processing of the external digital signal. 9. Open "Baseband Input Settings > Signal Monitoring" and monitor the signal over- flow status.

  • Page 224: How To Connect An R&S Ex-Iq-Box

    ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 4.9.12 How to connect an R&S EX-IQ-BOX Option: R&S SMW-B10 Transmission of digital I/Q signals to a DUT requires that the signals are adjusted to the type of interface, including its physical properties, and to the corresponding trans- mission protocol.
  • Page 225 ® Signal routing and system configuration R&S SMW200A How to connect external instruments and configure the signal flow 2. Download the setup file DigIConf_x.xx.xxx.exe from the R&S website: www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/EX-IQ-Box.html 3. Install the configuration software R&S DigIConf on the controller PC. 4.

  • Page 226: Configuring The Internal Baseband Source

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Overview of the signal generation modes 5 Configuring the internal baseband source The R&S SMW200A is a vector signal generator with internal signal generation and real-time functionality and with integrated arbitrary waveform generator. The instrument enables you to generate various digital modulation signals in accord- ance with the definitions in the corresponding specifications or with user-definable characteristics.

  • Page 227: Standard Or Wideband Baseband Generator

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Standard or wideband baseband generator ● Externally computed waveform files can be loaded in the instrument over the LAN, USB, or the GPIB interface. Create waveforms, for example, with the signal generation software R&S WinIQ- ®...
  • Page 228 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Standard or wideband baseband generator The choice which baseband generator to use, depends merely on the application: ● The standard baseband generator is the best choice in applications that require multichannel, MIMO or MSR scenarios. You find an insight of possible test scenarios in Chapter 4.1.2, "Test scenario and required system...

  • Page 229: Accessing The Functions In The Baseband Domain

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Accessing the functions in the baseband domain Where to find related information This description assumes a fully equipped Standard baseband R&S SMW200A, so that we can explain all instrument concepts and show the possible configuration and set- tings.

  • Page 230: Generating Signals According To Digital Standards

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating signals according to digital standards ● Chapter 5.12, "Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals", on page 419 ● The description of the digital standards ● Chapter 5.14, "Shifting the baseband signal", on page 429 5.4 Generating signals according to digital standards The R&S SMW200A generates digital signals in accordance with the specifications of the main communication and radio standards only if the corresponding firmware...
  • Page 231 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating signals according to digital standards LoRa This digital standard requires an instrument equipped with the LoRa option R&S SMW- K131. The LoRa option provides functionality to generate signals in accordance with the Semtech Corporation, Camarillo California, USA proprietary standard.
  • Page 232 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating signals according to digital standards For details, see the R&S SMW200A IEEE 802.11 WLAN user manual. IEEE 802.11ad, IEEE 802.1ay These digital standards require an instrument equipped with a wideband baseband generator option R&S SMW-B9, IEEE 802.11ad option R&S SMW-K141 and the IEEE 802.11ay option R&S SMW-K177.
  • Page 233 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating signals according to digital standards This option provides functionality to generate OFDM signals and signals according to predefined OFDM modulation schemes. For details, see the R&S SMW200A OFDM Signal Generation user manual. IEEE 802.16 WiMAX This digital standard requires an instrument equipped with the IEEE 802.16 WiMAX option R&S SMW-K49.

  • Page 234: Common Characteristics Of The Baseband Domain

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain For details, see the R&S SMW200ANFC A/B/F user manual. 5.5 Common characteristics of the baseband domain This chapter describes characteristics that are common to many baseband signal gen- eration tasks.
  • Page 235 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain ● About trigger signals..................... 245 ● Supported modulation signals................255 ● Supported coding schemes...................256 ● Supported baseband filters................... 257 ● Methods for optimizing the crest factor..............259 5.5.1.1 About data signals For the generation of modulation signals, the instrument uses the following input sig-...
  • Page 236 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Table 5-2: Overview of PRBS generators PRBS generator Sequence length /bit Feedback to GUI selection 9-bit Registers 4, 0 "PRBS 9"/"PN9" - 1 = 511 11-bit Registers 2, 0 "PRBS 11"/"PN11"...
  • Page 237 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-2: Timing deviations (t_hold and t_setup) between the clock and the data signals = "Timing Deviation < 0": data signal is received ahead of the clock signal. Data is held and output syn- hold chronous to the clock signal.
  • Page 238 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Table 5-4: Output connectors for the reference clock signal Baseband generator Connector Location GUI selection Standard T/M/C Local connectors on To configure the connector: ● "Custom. Dig. Mod/Digital Stan- each board (R&S SMW-B10) dard >...
  • Page 239 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Synchronizing data signals and clock signals When selecting data signals and clock signals, the following modes are possible: ● External clock and internal data The modulation data is generated internally. The clock synchronization can be based on the rising edge or the falling edge according to the configuration.
  • Page 240 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain The instrument internally generates control signals as configured in Chapter 5.6.3.8, "Control and marker lists editor", on page 295; the signals can be output on the T/M connectors.
  • Page 241 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-3: Signal behavior when power ramping and level attenuation are enabled Several parameters are provided for precise definition of the form and the steepness of ramp.

  • Page 242: Marker Modes

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Three marker output signals are available in each baseband. All marker signals can be output at the provided connectors but not always at the same time (see Chap- ter 12.2.2.5, "Internal resources for the trigger, marker, clock and control signals",...
  • Page 243 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Marker mode pulse Periodic marker with consecutive On and Off periods of equal length. The first On period starts at the beginning of the first generated sample/symbol. The marker fre- quency is defined by a "Divider".
  • Page 244 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Example: In the following example, the marker signal is defined by an "On Time" = 1 and "Off Time" = 2. Marker mode CList The instrument generates a marker signal that is defined in the selected control list. The R&S SMW200A provides a graphical interface for convenient definition of control signals among others also for the marker signals.
  • Page 245 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain The dependencies in Table 5-7 apply to the following marker modes and in all firmware options: ● "Pattern" ● "On/Off Ratio" ● "Pulse" ● "Period" ● "User Defined"...
  • Page 246 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Trigger sources The provided trigger sources are divided into two main groups, internally generated or externally supplied trigger signals. ● Internal ("Internal" and "Internal Baseband A/B") Internal trigger signals are generated by the instrument itself and can be used inde- pendently per baseband or routed from one to the other.
  • Page 247 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain About trigger modes A trigger event defines the signal generation and depends on the trigger mode. The Table 5-9 provides an overview of the trigger modes and their impact on the signal generation start.
  • Page 248 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-5: Trigger mode single * = Internal trigger event (to simplify the description) ** = The signal is generated once to the length specified with "Trigger Signal Duration" ●...
  • Page 249 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-7: Trigger mode retrigger * = Internal trigger event (to simplify the description) Compare the shape and the length of the red curve in single mode and in retrigger mode.
  • Page 250 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-9: Trigger mode armed retrigger * = Internal trigger event (to simplify the description) Impact of additional trigger settings The R&S SMW200A provides a set of settings to configure the behavior upon receiving of a trigger signal.
  • Page 251 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Table 5-10: Impact of the parameter Sync. Output to (External) Trigger "Sync. Output to (External) Trigger = On" "Sync. Output to (External) Trigger = Off" Suitable for long signal sequences Suitable for triggering of short signal sequences with signal duration comparable with the processing time The output signal is synchronous to the trigger event...
  • Page 252 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-10: Trigger delay and trigger inhibit in trigger mode retrigger To set delay and inhibit values Trigger delay and inhibit values are expressed in the units of the generated signal, e.g. in samples or symbols.
  • Page 253 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain 3. Set the delay in time units. a) Select "External Delay Unit" > "Time". b) Select "Specified External Delay" > "10 µs". The "Actual External Delay" changes to 10 us. 4.
  • Page 254 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Chapter 4.2.1, "Using the signal routing settings and the block diagram", on page 113 – Routing and summing of Streams in the "I/Q Stream Mapper" "I/Q stream mapper" on page 115 ●...
  • Page 255 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-12: Simultaneous triggering of two basebands in coupled trigger settings mode ** = This example assumes identical basebands and shows only the first two of them The signal generation starts simultaneous in all basebands but you can still delay the basebands compared to each other.
  • Page 256 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain bol. The resulting modulated signal is graphically represented by a constellation dia- gram, in that each possible symbol is represented by a discrete point on a complex plane.
  • Page 257 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Refer to Chapter 5.6.5.1, "Default settings and predefined configurations", on page 303 for overview on the available coding combinations. This section also defines the modu- lation formats for which the various coding procedures can be used. Related settings: ●...
  • Page 258 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain ● Filter settings in the dialogs of the firmware options Impact of the filter parameters The following is a simple description of the filter parameters and the way they affect the main filter characteristics.
  • Page 259 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain ● A "Cut Off Frequency Shift" = -1 results in a very narrow-band filter ● Increasing the value up to 1 makes the filter more broad-band ●...
  • Page 260 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain the crest factor differ regarding both the optimization achievable and the time required for computation. The provided crest factor reduction methods include: ● Internal calculation of optimized carrier phases for the individual carriers in a multi- carrier signal ●...

  • Page 261: Common Baseband Settings

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Figure 5-13: I/Q constellation without clipping The clipping mode in figure Figure 5-14 is vector | I + q | mode and the I/Q signal con- figuration has two active channels.
  • Page 262 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain The "General" tab comprises the primary settings of the standard, the functions for storing and recalling settings. It also provides access to further functions and dialogs, like the "Filter"...
  • Page 263 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain You can map trigger signals to one or more USER x or T/M connectors. Local and global connectors settings allow you to configure the signal mapping, the polarity, the trigger threshold and the input impedance of the input connectors.
  • Page 264 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Remote command: on page 1086 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM[:TRIGger]:SEQuence on page 1146 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary[:TRIGger]:SEQuence on page 1169 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW[:TRIGger]:SEQuence Running/Stopped With enabled modulation, displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes. ●...
  • Page 265 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain "Time" Sets the time of the time-based trigger in the format hh:mm:ss. Remote command: on page 1088 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:TIME:TIME [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TRIGger:TIME:TIME on page 1148 on page 1171 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:TIME:TIME Stops the signal generation until subsequent trigger event occurs.
  • Page 266 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain "External Local Clock/Trigger" require R&S SMW-B10. The polarity, the trigger threshold, and the input impedance of the input connectors can be configured in the "Local and global connectors settings" dialog. "Trigger sources"...
  • Page 267 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Remote command: on page 1090 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:DELay:UNIT on page 1152 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TRIGger:DELay:UNIT (Specified) External Delay/(Specified) Trigger Delay The name of the parameter and the units the delay is expressed in, changes depend- ing on the parameter (External) Delay Unit.
  • Page 268 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain ● To output a predefined sequence of the trigger signal. Remote command: on page 1087 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:TRIGger:SLENgth on page 1149 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TRIGger:SLUNit on page 1172 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:TRIGger:SLENgth 5.5.2.2 Marker settings Access: ►...
  • Page 269 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Mode Sets the marker mode that defines the shape and periodicity of the marker signals. You can configure marker modes for up to 3 markers. The marker configuration changes with the selected marker mode.
  • Page 270 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Defining the clock 1. Select "Clock" > "Source" to define the source of the clock signal. 2. For external clock signals, define the connector for the signal input. See Chap- ter 5.5.2.4, "Local and global connectors settings",...

  • Page 271: Triggering With A Common Signal

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Measured External Clock Option: R&S SMW-B10 Provided for permanent monitoring of the enabled and externally supplied clock signal. Remote command: on page 931 :CLOCk:INPut:FREQuency? 5.5.2.4 Local and global connectors settings Opens a dialog to configure local connectors or global connectors.
  • Page 272 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain To trigger commonly all basebands and to assure a synchronous generation start with the global trigger/clock signal, proceed as follows: ► Enable the same trigger source for both basebands. For example, select "Trigger In"...

  • Page 273: Time-Based Triggering

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain To route internally this signal and to use it for synchronous triggering of all other base- bands, proceed as follows: 1. Configure one of the local T/M connectors as input for the external local trigger sig- nal: a) "Baseband"...
  • Page 274 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain Test setup for coarse external time reference RF out 1 = NTP server 2 = R&S SMW200A Test setup for fine external time reference 1PPS out User x Ref out Ref in...
  • Page 275 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Common characteristics of the baseband domain To trigger to the internal time reference To trigger to the operating system time or an arbitrary internal time at the R&S SMW200A, proceed as follows: 1.

  • Page 276: Generating Custom Digital Modulation Signals

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals b) Select "Time Protocol" > "NTP". c) Enter the address of the NTP server. 4. Set "Baseband" > "ARB" > "State" > "On". The R&S SMW200A starts the signal generation if the "Current Time" matches the "Trigger Time"...

  • Page 277: Required Options

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals 5.6.1 Required options The equipment layout for generating the digital modulation signals includes: ● Option standard or wideband baseband generator (R&S SMW-B10/-B9) per signal path ● Option baseband main module, one/two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13/-B13T) or Option wideband baseband main module two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13XT) 5.6.2 About custom digital modulation An introduction to the supported filter, modulation, and coding schemes are provided...
  • Page 278 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals ● Power ramp control settings..................291 ● Data list editor....................... 293 ● Control and marker lists editor................295 5.6.3.1 General settings Access: ► Select "Baseband" > "Custom Digital Mod". This tab provides settings to configure the default settings, save and recall settings and general settings to configure a custom digital modulation signal.
  • Page 279 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Remote command: on page 1072 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:STATe Set To Default Calls default settings. The table Table 5-11 lists the most important values. Remote command: on page 1073 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRESet Save/Recall Accesses the "Save/Recall"...
  • Page 280 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Symbol Rate Selects the symbol rate. The value range of this parameter depends on the selected modulation type; the range is automatically redefined. An error message appears if the selected symbol rate is outside of the redefined range.
  • Page 281 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals To access external serial data settings Provide the external serial data and clock signals at the connectors listed in Table 5-3. 1. If you use a wideband baseband generator (R&S SMW-B9), select "System Con- figuration"...
  • Page 282 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Settings for Data Source > External................283 └ Receiver State....................283 └ Clock Input Slope..................284 └ Bit Clock Slope....................284 └ Order......................285 └ Clock to Data Time Deviation............... 285 └...
  • Page 283 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Remote command: on page 1095 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:CATalog? on page 1096 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:SELect on page 1099 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:COPY on page 1097 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:DELete Select Control List Accesses the standard "Select List" dialog to select an existing control list or to create a one.
  • Page 284 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals "Underflow" Data rate is too low or data is missing; zero symbols have been inser- ted. This indication is displayed as long as the signal is not restarted. Tip: Try out the following: ●...
  • Page 285 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Bit Order ← Settings for Data Source > External Sets the bit order, first, used to process the externally supplied higher bit modulation serial data. See also "External modulation data"...
  • Page 286 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals ● "Clock Input Slope" on page 284 ● "Bit Order" on page 285 Connector Settings Option: R&S SMW-B10 Opens a dialog to configure connector settings. See also Chapter 12.2, "Configuring local and global connectors", on page 745.
  • Page 287 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Deviation xxxx......................288 Gamma/Gamma 1.......................288 State Modulation CW Switching..................288 Modulation Type Selects a modulation type. The associated symbol mapping is displayed. If the configured modulation type does not allow a specific coding scheme, the "Cod- ing"...
  • Page 288 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Remote command: on page 1080 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:AQPSk:ANGLe FSK Type For "Variable FSK", selects the FSK modulation type. Available are 4FSK, 8FSK and 16FSK. Remote command: on page 1082 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:FSK:VARiable:TYPE Deviation xxxx For "Variable FSK", sets the deviation of the associated symbol.
  • Page 289 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals 5.6.3.5 Filter settings Access: ► Select "Baseband" > "Custom Digital Mod" > "Filter". This tab provides filter settings, like filter type and if available further filter settings. A simplified diagram shows the filter characteristics of the selected filter.
  • Page 290 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Cut Off Frequency Factor Requires the filter parameter "Lowpass (ACP optim.)" and "Lowpass (EVM optim.)". Sets the cutoff frequency factor. Adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter to meet your spectrum mask requirements.
  • Page 291 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals 5.6.3.6 Power ramp control settings Access: ► Select "Baseband" > "Custom Digital Mod" > "General" > "Power Ramp Control". The dialog comprises the settings used to configure the power ramping, like the source of the control signals, the form of the ramp function and the applied attenu- ation.
  • Page 292 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals State Enables/disables power ramping. Remote command: on page 1085 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp[:STATe] Source Defines the source for the power ramp control signals. "Internal" The control signals as defined in the internal control list are used for control purposes.
  • Page 293 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals For information about the required control signal, refer to "Power ramping and level attenuation" on page 239. Remote command: on page 1084 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:PRAMp:ATTenuation In Baseband Only Restricts power ramping to the baseband signal. "Off"...
  • Page 294 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals For example, in the directory /var/user/, enter "Filename" = dl_3gpp The "Data List Editor" is a list of binary values with a maximum length of 2 bits. This value corresponds to a file size of approx.
  • Page 295 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Selecting "Undo Select" deactivates the selected range. Copy, Cut, Paste Standard copy, cut, and paste functions. BIN/HEX Switches between hexadecimal and binary display. Every 4-bit group is displayed as a hexadecimal value. To increase readability, the hex- adecimal values in turn are displayed in pairs of two.
  • Page 296 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals 6. Select "Edit". The dedicated internal "Control Data Editor" is an intuitive graphical interface provi- ded for defining and managing of: ● Marker signals ● Control signals, like the CW, "Hop", "Burst Gate", and "Lev_Att" control signals See also Chapter 5.5.1.3, "About control signals",...
  • Page 297 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Preset Type......................... 297 Cursor Position......................298 Positions Control Signal....................298 Zoom/Visible........................298 Save/Save As......................299 Configure Control Signal Displays the color the marker/control signal has been assigned. The status checkbox indicates whether the individual marker or control signal is assigned or enabled (see Chapter 5.6.4.1, "How to create and assign a control list",...
  • Page 298 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals "Ramp Up/Down, Ramp Down/Up" Created is a ramp sequence of low to high and high to low transitions, respectively high to low, and low to high transitions. The ramps are symmetrically distributed around the center of the displayed signal area but can be later shifted as required.

  • Page 299: How To Create Data And Control Lists

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Remote command: n.a. Save/Save As Saves the changes in the selected control list file or in a new file. Remote command: n.a. 5.6.4 How to create data and control lists This section provides step-by-step instructions on configuring and using the provided settings.
  • Page 300 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals ● To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format, see "To create a control list in binary format" on page 345. To create a control list in ASCII format manually Use the intuitive build in Control and marker lists editor dialog:...
  • Page 301 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Figure 5-16: Example of control list settings 3. Select "Save" or "Save As" to save the used settings as a control list file. The created file is an ASCII file with the extension *.dm_iqc. Enable the instrument to use the control list, e.g.
  • Page 302 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals b) Select "Baseband" > "Custom Digital Mod" > "Marker" > "Local Connectors". c) Select "Routing" > "T/M 3" > "Direction" > "Output". The output signal is "Signal" > "Lev Att A". 5.6.4.2 How to create and assign a data list The R&S SMW200A provides the following ways to create a data list file:...

  • Page 303: References

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals How to assign and activate data lists Irrespectively on the way they are created, generated data lists are not automatically used. 1. To enable the R&S SMW200A to use the data list as a data source for the custom digital modulation: a) Select "Baseband"...
  • Page 304 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Settings Parameter Value "Trigger In" "Mode" "Auto" "Source" "Internal" "Marker" "Mode" "On/Off Ratio" "Clock" "Clock Source" "Internal" "Power Ramp Control" "State" "Off" "Source" "Internal" "Ramp Function" "Cosine" "Ramp Time"...
  • Page 305 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Standard Modulation Symbol rate Filter Coding SCPI filter type CDMA2000 Forward QPSK 1.2288 Msym/s cdmaOne + Equalizer cdma2000 CFORward CDMA2000 Reverse Offset QPSK 1.2288 Msym/s cdmaOne cdma2000 CREVerse CW in Baseband BPSK...
  • Page 306 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Table 5-13: Modulation type and coding combinations Modulation Coding Modulation Coding pi/8 D8PSK Differential, Differential + Gray, Gray Gray APCO25(8PSK) BPSK, AQPSK, OQPSK 8PSK Differential, Differential + Gray, Differential, Differential + Gray, Gray Gray...

  • Page 307: Common Coding Algorithms

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals 5.6.5.2 Common coding algorithms Coding notation In the notation used below, a denotes the n input symbol and b denotes the corre- spondingly coded output symbol. Individual bits in the symbols from the LSB (least sig- nificant bit) to the MSB (most significant bit) are denoted by a , etc.
  • Page 308 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Example: Differential coding for QPSK modulation with k = 2 bits per symbol Decimal display; the value range for modulation symbols is a = {0, 1, 2, 3}. According to Table 5-14 and for k = 2, the recursive coding is as follows:...
  • Page 309 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals Symbol d Phase difference Symbol d Phase difference 135° 225° 90° 180° VHF data link (VDL) coding for modulation types with 3 bits/symbol, for example 8PSK. 5.6.5.3 Predefined baseband filters Table 5-18 shows the filters that are available, together with their associated...
  • Page 310 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals "Gauss Linearized" "Edge Narrow Pulse Shape" "Edge Wide Pulse Shape" "cdmaOne" User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...
  • Page 311 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals "cdmaOne 705kHz" "cdmaOne + Equalizer" "cdmaOne 705kHz + Equalizer" "cdma2000 3X" User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...
  • Page 312 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals "APCO25" "APCO25 (H-CPM)" "Roll Off Factor" "APCO25 (LSM)" "Split Phase" "Gauss Cut Off Frequency" "B*T" "Lowpass Cut Off Frequency" User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...
  • Page 313 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating custom digital modulation signals "Rectangular" "Dirac" "Lowpass (ACP optim.)" "Lowpass (EVM optim.)" User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...

  • Page 314: Using The Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Arb)

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) "EUTRA/LTE" 5.7 Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) The arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) is an I/Q modulation source of the R&S SMW200A. The ARB allows the playback and output of any externally calculated modulation signals in the form of waveform files.

  • Page 315: Required Options

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) ● Required options....................315 ● About ARB......................315 ● settings......................321 ● Playing waveform files..................331 ● Tags for waveforms, data and control lists............347 5.7.1 Required options The equipment layout for processing of waveform files includes: ●...
  • Page 316 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) ARB file formats You can load the following file formats using the "Load Waveform" function. File format I/Q format Description Max. file size *.wv Real and complex Standard waveform file format, see Chapter 5.7.2.2, Limited by internal "About waveform...
  • Page 317 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Waveform file sources The following waveform file sources are available: ● Internally generated waveforms The ARB enables the calculation and the generation of waveform files. The ARB also provides a built-in function to create a test waveform and keep it as a file or in the RAM.
  • Page 318 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) The first sine signal is mapped on the I samples, the second on the Q samples. The two signals differ by a selectable phase offset. For a –90 deg offset, the result is a unit vector in the I/Q plane, rotating counterclockwise and starting at I = 0, Q = –1.
  • Page 319 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) For more information, refer to the specifications document. 5.7.2.4 Waveform sample rate The Arbitrary Waveform Generator includes a resampling unit that interpolates the input samples to target a certain digital output I/Q sample rate. The input sample rate is retrieved from the waveform (the default sample rate tag) or is defined by the input corresponding parameter in the ARB user interface.
  • Page 320 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Impact of the oversampling factor Waveforms generated by the R&S WinIQSIM2 software can be optimized by choosing a suitable integer oversampling factor. Conventional ARB often assumes an oversampling factor of 4. The ARB of the R&S SMW200A requires low oversampling factors and still provides excellent signal quality in terms of EVM and ACP.

  • Page 321: Arb Settings

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) 5.7.3 ARB settings Access: ► Select "Baseband" > "ARB". The "ARB" dialog enables direct selection of the waveform file to be processed, the selection of a test signal or access to the multi-segment and multicarrier settings. If the current instrument configuration uses Coupled sources, you can assign...
  • Page 322 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Further settings depend on the system configuration and the waveform type: ● If you use a single-segment waveform, the tab also provides settings for configur- ing the test signal and access to the settings for calculating a multi-segment or a multicarrier waveform.

  • Page 323: State

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) State Enables ARB modulation. Switching on the ARB turns off all the other digital standards and digital modulation types in the same signal path. The output is based on the waveform file that is loaded. The name of the waveform file is displayed next to "Load Waveform".

  • Page 324: Waveforms Table

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Waveforms table If the current instrument configuration uses Coupled sources, the dialog displays a table with of up to 8 rows, where the number of rows corresponds to the number of selected BB Signals (Tx Antennas) Entities (Users,...

  • Page 325: Clock Frequency

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Clock Frequency Displays or sets the ARB output clock rate. The value of this parameter is set to the clock rate defined in the loaded waveform file ({CLOCK} tag).

  • Page 326: Create Test Signal

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Create Test Signal Opens a dialog with further test signal settings. Provided are the following test signals: ● Chapter 5.7.3.2, "Sine test signal settings", on page 326 ●...
  • Page 327 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Remote command: on page 1113 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TSIGnal:SINE:FREQuency Samples per Period Enters the number of sample values required from the sine wave per period. The maximum allowed value is determined by the maximum ARB clock rate and the selected frequency.
  • Page 328 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) 3. Select "Create Test Signal". This dialog provides settings to configure a rectangular test signal. A rectangular test signal with a duty factor of 0.5 is created. Amplitude and offset are adjustable. Both paths, I and Q, use the same signal.
  • Page 329 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Remote command: on page 1113 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TSIGnal:RECTangle:OFFSet Generate Signal File Generates a signal and saves it as a waveform file on the hard disk. Use the standard "File Select"...
  • Page 330 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Remote command: on page 1112 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TSIGnal:CIQ:I on page 1112 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TSIGnal:CIQ:Q Generate Signal File Generates a signal and saves it as a waveform file on the hard disk. Use the standard "File Select"...

  • Page 331: Playing Waveform Files

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) For more information on marker modes, see Chapter 5.5.1.4, "About marker signals", on page 241. Note: Setting an ARB marker mode that is differrent than "Unchanged" does not change the marker trace in the loaded waveform file.
  • Page 332 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) – For R&S SMW-K300/-K301 Pulse Sequencer, see the R&S Pulse Sequencer software user manual. ● External waveform generation with MATLAB, see Chapter 5.7.4.5, "Creating wave- forms with tag file format", on page 338 and 1GP60.
  • Page 333 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) This function enables the calculation of the signal and saves the information in a wave- form file. After saving, you can load the waveform file in the ARB. To generate an LTE waveform file 1.
  • Page 334 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) 4. Select "ARB" > "State" > "On". The R&S SMW200A processes the waveform file. 5.7.4.4 Working with R&S WinIQSIM2 The following example illustrates how to use R&S WinIQSIM2 simulation software to generate an EUTRA/LTE waveform and load it in the ARB of the R&S SMW200A.
  • Page 335 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Alternatively, use the "New" function to add the R&S SMW200A manually to the list of instruments. 4. Close the dialog. 5. In the block diagram, select "Vector Sig Gen" block and select the R&S SMW200A form the list.
  • Page 336 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) R&S WinIQSIM2 calculates the signal and displays important signal parameters, for example, number of samples "Samples" and "Sample Rate". User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─ 38...
  • Page 337 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Select "Graphics" > "Graphic 1 (Complete)" to check for more information on the gen- erated signal. The display confirms the expected EUTRA/LTE 10 MHz spectrum. To transfer the waveform file to the R&S SMW200A 1.
  • Page 338 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) R&S WinIQSIM2 transmits the waveform to the default directory of the R&S SMW200A. 3. In the R&S SMW200A, select "Baseband" > "ARB". The dialog confirms that the ARB is active and plays the transmitted waveform. 5.7.4.5 Creating waveforms with tag file format As described in...
  • Page 339 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) The decimal values in SICO.txt are normalized such that they are between –1.0 and +1.0. The data is converted into binary format. The appropriate mandatory tags are added and the data is packed into the WAVEFORM tag.
  • Page 340 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) 2. Convert the values from the file SICO.txt into binary format consisting of 16-bit signed integer numbers. The numeric range between –1.0 and +1.0 corresponds to the modulation range of the waveform 16-bit D/A converter of -32767 to +32767.
  • Page 341 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Length = Number of I/Q pairs * 4 + 1 = 20*4 + 1 = 81 bytes ● Place the string {WAVEFORM-81:# at the beginning of the data set ●...
  • Page 342 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) if (fp == 0) return; for (i=0; i<samples; i++) grad = (360.0f / (float)samples) * (float)i; rad = grad * (pi / 180.0f); fprintf(fp, "%f %f\n", sin(rad), cos(rad)); fclose(fp);...
  • Page 343 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) 5.7.4.6 Defining periodically repeating traces If you test setup requires marking an event, for example, each frame start, it is suffi- cient to define the trace ones and repeat it over the length of a waveform. Repeating is useful for long waveforms with periodical marker signals.
  • Page 344 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Example: CONTROL LENGTH tag and trace processing In the example below, use the same marker traces and set the CONTROL LENGTH tag, for example {CONTROL LENGTH: 150}. Figure 5-23: Example: Processing control signals with CONTROL LENGTH tag The length of all control signals is determined by the CONTROL LENGTH.
  • Page 345 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Insert these tags after the TYPE tag in arbitrary order. For example, the control list file contains the following information: {TYPE:SMU-CL}{COPYRIGHT:Rohde&Schwarz} {DATE:2012-06-11;15:00:09}{HOP LIST:0:0;498:1;506:0} {CW MODE LIST:0:0;380:1}{LEVATT LIST 3:0:0;464:1} {BURST LIST:0:0;122:1;270:0;582:1;924:0} {MARKER LIST 4:0:0;706:1;764:0} {MARKER LIST 3:0:0;530:1;633:0}...
  • Page 346 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) 5.7.4.8 Creating data lists with tag file format The R&S SMW200A provides the following ways to create a data list file: ● To use the dedicated "Data List Editor" and create a file with extension *.dm_iqd, "To create data lists manually"...

  • Page 347: Tags For Waveforms, Data And Control Lists

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Example: To assign and activate a data list We assume, that a created data list file dl.dm_iqd in the directory /var/user/. The following example shows how to use this data list as data source for the custom digital modulation.
  • Page 348 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) ● The Data is tag-specific, and usually it is in ASCII plain text. ● The Length specifies the number of bytes in a WAVEFORM tag, DATA LIST tag, or EMPTYTAG Length is an ASCII integer value, defining the number of bytes from the colon : to the end brace }...
  • Page 349 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Common tags ....................349 {TYPE: magic, xxxxxxxx} ......................350 {COMMENT: string} ..................... 350 {COPYRIGHT: string} ..................350 {DATE: yyyy-mm-dd;hh:mm:ss} {TYPE: magic, xxxxxxxx} (mandatory, must be the first tag in the file) Identifies the file as a valid R&S SMW200A file.
  • Page 350 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Example: {TYPE: SMU-WV,106656} BB:ARB:WAV:TAG? 'TYPE' Queries the content of the TYPE tag. Response: 'SMU-WV,106656' This is a valid waveform. {COMMENT: string} The tag contains a plain text ASCII string of arbitrary length. The string is not analyzed in the R&S SMW200A.
  • Page 351 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Usage: Setting only 5.7.5.2 Tags for waveforms The following tags apply to waveforms exclusively. For all tags, see "Supported tags:" on page 348. Waveform tags .......................351 {CLOCK: frequency} ................
  • Page 352 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Figure 5-24: Example: Processing of MARKER TRACE if CONTROL LENGHT is specified If the CONTROL LENGTH tag is not used, the marker and control list length are deter- mined by the last position, that is the last {Pos:State} couple, defined in the particular [TRACE] LIST tag;...
  • Page 353 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) EmptySequence An empty sequence containing blanks only. The number of used blanks is calculated as the difference between the hex addresses of the {WAVEFORM} tag and the hash sign # in the {EMPTYTAG}.
  • Page 354 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) A positive PeakOffset_dB value indicates that a headroom to full scale is provided when generating the waveform. A negative PeakOffset_dB value indicates that overrange is likely for some samples, i.e.
  • Page 355 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) {SAMPLES: Samples} (recommended for waveforms) The tag contains the number of I/Q samples in the waveform in ASCII format. On multi-segment waveforms, this tag contains the total I/Q samples of all segments. Example: {SAMPLES: 1000} BB:ARB:WAV:TAG? 'SAMPLES'...
  • Page 356 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Specifies in ASCII format the position (i.e. sample number or data value), with the effect from which the binary State of the marker or of the control signal changes. If you use the marker mode tag, the maximum number of marker states is 64, i.e.
  • Page 357 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) The values of the 2 bytes in an I component and a Q component are in the range 0x0 to 0xFFFF (-32767 to +32767). This value is transferred to the D/A converter.
  • Page 358 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) {MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT: NumOfSeg} (mandatory for multi-segment waveforms) The tag contains the number of segments in the multi-segment waveform in ASCII inte- ger format. Example: {MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT: 2} Multi-segment waveform with 2 segments Usage: Setting only {MWV_SEGMENT_DURATION: SegDur0, SegDur1, …, SegDurN-1}...
  • Page 359 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) {MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE: Mode} (mandatory for multi-segment waveforms) The tag contains a string in ASCII format which supplies the clock rate mode. The cal- culation of the multi-segment output waveform uses this clock rate mode. See also "Clock"...
  • Page 360 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) See also "Level" on page 384. Setting parameters: Mode UNCHANGED Concerning the level settings, the segments are output exactly as defined in the individual files. The value displayed with the parameter "Task bar > Level" applies only to the segment with the highest RMS value.
  • Page 361 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) {MWV_SEGMENT_FILES: “FileNameSeg0.wv”, “FileNameSeg1.wv”, …, “FileNameSegN-1.wv”} (optional for multi-segment waveforms) The tag contains a list of filenames for every segment in the multi-segment waveform in ASCII format. Example: {MWV_SEGMENT_FILES: "/var/user/temp/sine.wv", "/var/user/temp/rect.wv"}...
  • Page 362 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Setting parameters: Length Sets the number of bytes in the CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 tag in ASCII Format and is calculated as follows: Length = size of "#" (1 byte) + number of marker elements m (4 bit) / (8 bits/byte) The value is rounded up for byte alignment.
  • Page 363 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) Example: {DATA LIST-17: #d0d1...dx...d127} 16 bytes containing 128 data bits, first bit is the MS bit of the first byte. Usage: Setting only 5.7.5.5 Tags for control lists The following tags apply to control lists exclusively.
  • Page 364 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Using the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) To maintain marker signals and waveform data synchronized, set the CONTROL LENGTH to be equal to the number of samples specified with the tag SAMPLES. See also Chapter 5.7.4.6, "Defining periodically repeating traces", on page 343.

  • Page 365: Generating Notched Signals

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals Example: {MARKER LIST 1: 0:0;10:1;20:0;30:1} BB:DM:CLIS:TAG? 'MARKER LIST 1' Queries the content of the MARKER LIST 1 tag of the selected control list file. Response: '0:0;10:1;20:0;30:1' The marker setting for samples 0 to 9 = 0 (low), for 10 to 19 = 1 (high) and for 20 to 29 = 0.

  • Page 366: About The Notch Filters

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals – Option OFDM Signal Generation (R&S SMW-K114), per signal path – Option OneWeb User-Defined Signal Generation, OneWeb Reference Signals (R&S SMW-K130/-K355), per signal path ● Frequency option (e.g. R&S SMW-B1003) For more information, refer to the specifications document.
  • Page 367 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals 6. Select "Notch Filter > Apply" to trigger the instrument to adopt the notch filter set- tings. 7. Select "ARB > General > State > On". Comprises the settings for enabling the notch filter and indicates the clock fre- quency for the waveform.
  • Page 368 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals Remote command: on page 1141 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:NOTCh etc. for the corresponding option: on page 1140 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DVB:NOTCh on page 1140 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:NOTCh on page 1140 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:OFDM:NOTCh on page 1141 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ONEWeb:NOTCh Clock Frequency Indicates the current clock frequency of the waveform signal.
  • Page 369 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals on page 1141 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:OFDM:NOTCh<ch>:STATe on page 1142 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ONEWeb:NOTCh<ch>:STATe Frequency Offset /MHz ← Notch definition table Specifies the center frequency of the notch f , where: offset –Clock Frequency/2 < f <...

  • Page 370: Awgn Test Signal Settings

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals 5.8.4 AWGN test signal settings Option: R&S SMW-K811. See also Chapter 5.8.1, "Required options", on page 365. Access: 1. Select "Baseband" > "ARB". 2. Select "General" > "Test Signal Form" > "AWGN". 3.
  • Page 371 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating notched signals The clock frequency f is 100 MHz per default. You can change it, see the next clock step. 6. Optionally, adjust the clock frequency f . The bandwidth of the resulting noise clock signal is approximately 0.96 * f clock...

  • Page 372: Reducing The Crest Factor

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files The maximum number of samples depends on the installed ARB options. Remote command: on page 1115 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:TSIGnal:AWGN:SAMPles Generate Signal RAM Generates an AWGN test signal waveform. The instrument saves the file with a prede- fined name and loads it into the ARB.
  • Page 373 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Figure 5-29: ARB multi-segment waveform concept It is also possible to create and output a blank segment. These segments contain zero signal. For typical applications of multi-segment waveforms, see Chapter 5.10.4, "Working with multi-segment waveform files",...
  • Page 374 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files this procedure is the scaling of the instantaneous amplitude of the various waveforms to a common RMS level. 5.10.2.3 File concept To provide flexible configuration, the building of a composed multi-segment waveform file involves different stages;...
  • Page 375 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Figure 5-30: Example of marker signals The segment start is defined by the low-high slope of the marker, which applies for switching between two segments and if there is a segment replay. ●...
  • Page 376 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Figure 5-32: Principle of segment triggering = To simplify the description, an internal next segment trigger event ("Exec. Next Segment") and an internal trigger event ("Execute Trigger") are used; an external trigger event has the same effect on the signal generation.
  • Page 377 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Defining the transition between the segments The R&S SMW200A provides the parameter "Next Segment Mode" to define the tran- sition to the next segment, see the table Table 5-20.

  • Page 378: Multi-Segment Settings

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files ● The triangle on the top line denotes a trigger event. A filled triangle on the bottom line denotes a next segment event. ● A green sine wave (or other shape) over a full period indicates one replay cycle of a segment.
  • Page 379 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 4. Select "Baseband" > "ARB" > "General". The "Load Waveform" confirms that the current multi-segment file is loaded (file- name as defined with "Output File"). Note: The provided settings depend on the current waveform. The "Sequencing List"...
  • Page 380 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Settings: List........................380 Load List........................380 Save List/Save List As....................380 Sequencing List......................380 Comment........................380 Output File........................381 Create Output File/Create and Load Output File............381 New List Opens the standard "Create Multi Segment Waveform List" function to enter the name of the new file.
  • Page 381 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Output File Opens the standard "File Select" dialog function and requests the filename for the multi-segment waveform to be calculated. An output filename is required for further processing of the multi-segment waveform: ●...
  • Page 382 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 6. Configure the "Blank Segment Settings" as required. This section provides settings to create and adjust the contents of the multi-seg- ment file. Settings: Segment Table......................382 Append/Delete/Shift Seg. Up/Down................
  • Page 383 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files "Info" Indication of the possible comments contained in the waveform. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:WSEGment:CONFigure:SEGMent:CATalog? on page 1122 Append/Delete/Shift Seg. Up/Down Standard handling functions: "Append" Opens the standard "File Select" dialog for navigation to and selec- tion of the waveform file to be added on the end of the existing list.
  • Page 384 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 2. In the dialog "ARB: Multi Segment" > "General", select an existing list. 3. Select "ARB: Multi Segment" > "Segment Table" to configure the segments. 4. Select "ARB: Multi Segment" > "Level/Clock/Marker". The "Level/Clock/Marker"...
  • Page 385 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files "Highest" All segments have the highest available clock rate. Note: Trade-off between fast switch over and computing time. This mode provides short switch-over times between segments. But the computing time increases because the individual segments are resampled.
  • Page 386 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files If additional marker generation is enabled, the existing marker signals in the individual segment waveform files are not considered, see also Chapter 5.10.2.4, "Impact of the marker settings", on page 374.
  • Page 387 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 11. Use the "Append"/"Delete" and "Up"/"Down" functions to configure the order of pro- cessing the segments. The user interface shows the configured play list in the form of a "Sequencing Graphic".
  • Page 388 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Remote command: on page 1122 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:WSEGment:SEQuence:SELect Save List/Save List As Saves the current entries of the table in a play list file. Play list files have the file exten- sion *.wvs.
  • Page 389 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files └ Delete......................390 └ Shift Id# Up/Shift Id# Down................390 Sequencing Graphic....................390 Sequencing Play List The "Sequencing Play List" table defines the sequence order for processing the wave- form file segments. Also, you can set the repetition of individual segments. "Id#"...
  • Page 390 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Remote command: on page 1122 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:WSEGment:SEQuence:SELect on page 1122 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:WSEGment:SEQuence:APPend Delete ← Sequencing Play List Deletes the selected row. Shift Id# Up/Shift Id# Down ← Sequencing Play List Rearranges the rows that means moves the selected row up and down.
  • Page 391 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Settings: Current Segment/Current Segment Index..............391 Segment........................391 Next Segment Mode....................391 Next Segment Source....................392 Level Mode........................392 Execute Next Segment....................393 Sequencing List......................393 Trigger Example......................393 Current Segment/Current Segment Index Indicates the waveform segment (segment filename and index) that is output.
  • Page 392 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Note: The seamless switch over and the sequencer mode require segments with equal sample rate. "Same Segment" The processing of the multi-segment waveform file is similar to the processing of a non-multi-segment waveform.

  • Page 393: Working With Multi-Segment Waveform Files

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files Execute Next Segment For "Next Segment Source = Internal", triggers manually switch over to the subsequent segment in the multi-segment file. The subsequent segment can be any segment within the multi-segment file and is defined by the parameter "Segment".
  • Page 394 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 3. In the "ARB: Multi Segment" > "Level/Clock/Marker" dialog, adjust the "Level", "Clock", and "Segment Marker" settings. 4. Select the "ARB" > "Create Multi Segment" > "General" > "Output File" to enter the filename.
  • Page 395 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files The transition between the segments is abrupt. 2. To enable manual next segment triggering, select "ARB" > "Trigger In (MSW)" > "Next Segment Source" > "Internal". 3. To enable manual triggering, proceed as follows: a) Select "ARB"...
  • Page 396 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files To overcome wrap-around problems and generate multi-segment signals without signal gaps between the segments, consider the following settings: 1. Enable "ARB" > "Trigger In (MSW)" > "Next Segment Mode" > "Next Segment Seamless"...
  • Page 397 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 6. If the waveforms in the multi-segment file feature different sample rates, select "ARB" > "Create Multi Segment" > "Level/Clock/Marker" > "Clock Mode" > "High- est" or "Clock Mode" > "Highest" to resample the waveforms. The switch over between the segments is triggered by the receiving of an external trigger event.
  • Page 398 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 5. To save the configuration, select "General" > "Save List" . 6. To use this play list, select "ARB" > "Trigger (MSW)" > "Next Segment Mode" > "Sequencer". 7.

  • Page 399: Reference To Triggering Of Multi-Segment Waveforms

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 5. Enable "Level/Clock/Marker > Segment Restart = Marker 2" An extra restart marker signal is generated at the beginning of each segment and the beginning of the waveform. These restart markers overwrite the existing Marker 1 and Marker 2 trace signals defined in the waveforms of the individual segments.
  • Page 400 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files 5.10.5.2 Triggering in "Next trigger mode = next segment" Depending on the trigger setting, the segment selected under "Segment" is output either immediately or after a trigger event. If the segment index is changed in "Seg- ment", the new segment is not output until a trigger occurs.
  • Page 401 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-segment waveform files For description of the "Retrigger" and "Armed_Retrigger" trigger modes, see Table 5-22. 5.10.5.3 Triggering in "Next trigger mode = next segment seamless" The segment selected under "Segment" is output. This mode is only available if all segments have the same sample rate.

  • Page 402: Generating Multicarrier Waveform Signals

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals 5.11 Generating multicarrier waveform signals To simulate complex multicarrier scenarios with different baseband signals, the R&S SMW200A provides the possibility to generate multicarrier waveforms. These waveforms can consist of up to 512 carriers, each modulated by the same or by differ- ent user-selectable baseband signal.
  • Page 403 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals To generate a multicarrier CW, create a constant DC input signal, see "Create Test Sig- nal" on page 326. Select a signal period that is matching the carrier frequency distan- ces.

  • Page 404: Multicarrier Settings

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals The method rounds the value of the carrier spacing Δf so that the carrier that is round closest to the center RF frequency shows no phase jump. Also, this method holds for unmodulated carriers only.
  • Page 405 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals The "ARB: Multi Carrier" dialog opens. It provides general settings to configure the carrier distribution around the center frequency and to improve the output signal characteristics. The tab "Carrier Table" allows selecting a waveform file per carrier. Use the "Car- rier Graph"...
  • Page 406 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Target Crest Factor..................... 407 Filter Cut Off Frequency....................408 Signal Period Mode.....................408 Signal Period Mode.....................408 Power Reference......................409 Create/Create and Load....................410 Set to Default Calls the default settings. Parameter Value "Number of Carriers"...
  • Page 407 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals When the number of carriers is increased, new lines are added at the end of the table. If these carriers already have been defined before, the settings are preset according to the former settings.
  • Page 408 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Filter Cut Off Frequency Requires "Clipping" > "On". Sets the cutoff frequency of the lowpass filter before the output of the multicarrier sig- nal. See also Chapter 5.11.2.2, "Optimizing the crest factor", on page 404.
  • Page 409 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Power Reference Sets the method of leveling individual carriers in a composed multicarrier signal. The difference between the provided modes is especially important if signals with different crest factors are composed together into a multicarrier signal. "RMS"...
  • Page 410 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals "Peak" The individual carriers are leveled based on their peak power and the configured "Carrier Gain". Example: A multicarrier signal is composed from two waveform files. First carrier "Gain" = 0 dB Second carrier "Gain"...
  • Page 411 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Also, saves this multicarrier waveform with filename as set in "Output File". Depending on the configuration of the multicarrier waveform, calculation can take some time. To stop the calculation, use the "Abort" function. Remote command: on page 1134 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:CREate...
  • Page 412 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Remote command: on page 1134 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:CLOCk? File Size Displays the resulting number of samples of the multicarrier waveform. Remote command: on page 1131 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:SAMPles? 5.11.3.3 Carrier table settings Access: ►...
  • Page 413 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals File..........................413 Info..........................414 !!!..........................414 Number of Carriers Defines the number of carriers of the multicarrier waveform, see "Number of Carriers" on page 406. Remote command: on page 1130 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:CARRier:COUNt Carrier number Displays the number of an individual carrier.
  • Page 414 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Remote command: on page 1136 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:CARRier<ch>:FILE Info Opens a waveform information dialog. This dialog lists the sample rate, the number of I/Q value pairs (number of samples) and the signal period. Remote command: n.a.
  • Page 415 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Gain Step........................415 Phase Start......................... 415 Phase Step........................416 Delay Start........................416 Delay Step........................416 Input Waveform File....................416 Apply Assistant Settings....................416 Carrier State Enables the carriers in the range "Carrier Start" to "Carrier Stop". Remote command: on page 1136 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:ARBitrary:MCARrier:EDIT:CARRier:STATe...
  • Page 416 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals Phase Step Sets the step size that is used to increment the phase. The resulting phase in the carrier table equals: Phase = "Phase Start" + n*"Phase Step" n is a value between 0 and the difference of "Carrier Stop"...

  • Page 417: How To Use The Multicarrier Function

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals 5.11.3.5 Carrier graph Access: ► Select "Create Multi Carrier" > "Carrier Graph". The carrier graph is a graphical representation of the current multicarrier configura- tion in the frequency domain. The height of the bars corresponds to the gain of each individual carrier.
  • Page 418 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multicarrier waveform signals To set up a standard transmitter test, proceed as follows: 1. Open the "Baseband" > "3GPP FDD" dialog. Proceed as follows: a) Select "3GPP FDD" > "Basestations" > "Test Setups/Models". b) Select "3GPP FDD: Downlink/Test Model"...

  • Page 419: Generating Multi-Carrier Continuous Wave Signals

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals 6. Select "ARB: Multi Carrier" > "Carrier Graph" to visualize the configuration. 7. Select "ARB: Multi Carrier" > "General" > "Output Settings" > "Output File". 8. Enter the name of the output file, for example 4x5MHz_3gpp_1_16. 9.

  • Page 420: Required Options

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals 5.12.1 Required options The equipment layout for processing of waveform files includes: ● Option standard or wideband baseband generator (R&S SMW-B10/-B9) per signal path ● Option baseband main module, one/two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13/-B13T) or Option wideband baseband main module two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13XT) ●...
  • Page 421 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.5.4, "SOURce:BB:MCCW subsystem", on page 1157. Settings: 5.12.3.1 General carrier settings Access: ► Select "Baseband" > "Multi Carrier CW". Settings: State..........................421 Set to...
  • Page 422 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals MCCW signals are computed in arbitrary waveform mode. To adopt the changes in the settings of individual carriers, select "Accept". This selection applies to the settings in the "Table Setup Assistant"...
  • Page 423 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals Optimize Crest Factor Mode Selects the mode for automatically minimizing the crest factor. The carrier start phases are automatically configured according to the selected mode. Methods of reducing the crest factor differ regarding both the optimization achievable and the time required for computation.
  • Page 424 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals Settings: Table Setup Assistant....................424 └ Carrier Start/Stop..................424 └ Carrier State....................424 └ Power Start....................425 └ Power Step....................425 └ Phase Start....................425 └ Phase Step....................425 └...
  • Page 425 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals Power Start ← Table Setup Assistant Sets the power of the starting carrier. Remote command: on page 1167 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:MCCW:EDIT:CARRier:POWer[:STARt] Power Step ← Table Setup Assistant Sets the width of the step with which the power is changed from carrier to carrier. The individual power of each carrier ("Carrier Table"...
  • Page 426 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals "Phase" Sets the starting phase of a carrier. If you use the Table Setup Assistant settings to fill the individual car- rier phases, the phase of a carrier is calculated as follows: "Phase Start"...

  • Page 427: Using Mccw Signals

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals For detailed description, see: ● Chapter 5.5.2.1, "Trigger settings", on page 262 ● Chapter 5.5.2.2, "Marker settings", on page 268 ● Chapter 5.5.2.3, "Clock settings", on page 269 ●...

  • Page 428: References

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Generating multi-carrier continuous wave signals 5. Adjust further settings, for example, trigger settings, as required. 6. Set "Multi Carrier CW" > "State" > "On". 7. Set "RF" > "On" to enable the signal output. 8.

  • Page 429: Generating A Linear Slope Ramp Waveform

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal Parameter Value Source Internal Multichannel Setup Start Carrier Stop Carrier State Power 0 dB Power Step 0 dB Initial Phase 0° Phase Step 0° Channel Setup State Phase 0°...
  • Page 430 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal 5.14.1.1 Impact of the frequency offset For some applications, it is helpful to shift the baseband signal with a user-defined baseband frequency offset to a different center frequency to improve signal character- istics.
  • Page 431 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal Example: To calculate the maximum frequency offset This example uses the following signal: ● Standard: "Baseband" > "Custom Digital Mod" ● "Set according to Stanard" > "WCDMA-3GPP" ● "Symbol Rate"...
  • Page 432 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal To observe the effect of offsetting the phase Use the built-in real-time graphical display. Select "System Config" > "Graphics" > "Constellation" and observe that the points on the I/Q constellation diagram are turning counterclockwise.

  • Page 433: Baseband Offset Settings

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal 5.14.2 Baseband offset settings Access: ► Select "Baseband"/"BB Input" > "Baseband Offsets". The "Baseband Offsets" dialog provides settings to offset the frequency or phase of the baseband signal. Also, you can add a relative gain to the baseband signal.

  • Page 434: Improving Signal Characteristics By Shifting The Baseband Signal

    ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal Gain Enters the relative gain for the external or internal baseband signal compared with the signals of the other baseband sources, if the signals are added. The gain affects the signal on the output of the "BB Input" block. Refer to Chapter 5.14.1.3, "Impact of the gain",...
  • Page 435 ® Configuring the internal baseband source R&S SMW200A Shifting the baseband signal ● A spectrum analyzer is connected to the R&S SMW200A, the analyzed is config- ured and measures the required signal characteristics. To shift the generated baseband signal 1. Select "Baseband" > "Baseband Offsets". 2.

  • Page 436: Fading, Predistorting And Impairing The Signal

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal 6 Fading, predistorting and impairing the sig- The test case scenarios in accordance with the specifications often require a not "clean" signal but rather a signal that is impaired or interfered. To fulfill such require- ments, the R&S SMW200A is equipped with a fading simulator and noise generator and provides the possibility to impair and predistort the digital I/Q signal.

  • Page 437: About The Awgn Generator

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal 6.2.2 About the AWGN generator Provided the required options are installed, the R&S SMW200A allows you to superim- pose noise on the generated signal. The built-in internal noise generator generates an AWGN signal (Additive White Gaussian Noise) with selectable bandwidth and adds it to the digital baseband signal.
  • Page 438 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Signal and noise parameters Figure 6-2 illustrates the relation between the signal and noise parameters. Figure 6-2: Graphical representation of the relation between system bandwidth and noise bandwidth (Minimum Noise/System BW = 2) System BW* = Occupied BW The system bandwidth is a measure for the transmitted RF bandwidth.
  • Page 439 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal For a correct measurement of the noise power within the system bandwidth, we recom- mend that you measure the channel power with a signal analyzer. In the "Additive Noise" mode, the output signal is the signal with the noise distribution. Hence, the power level at the RF output corresponds to the carrier+noise power (see Figure 6-3).
  • Page 440 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Understanding the displayed information The following example explains the impact of the AWGN settings on the signal and noise parameters. Figure 6-3 for an example of an AWGN generation with the following configuration: ●...
  • Page 441 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal RF Signal Signal AWGN R&S NRP-Zxx Power Sensor Noise BW Figure 6-3: AWGN: Understanding the displayed information Bit Rate derived from the selected "Symbol Rate = 3.840 Msym/s" = Selected Carrier/Noise Ratio Noise Power...
  • Page 442 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal 4, 7, 10 = Carrier Power = Status bar > Level = -30 dBm 5, 8 Carrier+Noise Power = power at the RF A output; i.e. the power a connected power meter would measure 6, 9 Noise Bandwidth...

  • Page 443: Awgn Block

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal 6.2.3 AWGN block The "AWGN" block provides access to the settings for the AWGN generator, see Chapter 6.2.4, "AWGN settings", on page 443. The label in the AWGN block indicates the AWGN mode that is activated.
  • Page 444 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Figure 6-4: Representation of the AWGN blocks in System Configuration > Advanced Mode" = Example of an 1x4x4 configuration = Dedicated LEDs indicate the state of each stream. = Example of a 2x2x2 configuration 4, 5 = AWGN mode indication: AWGN indicates "AWGN Mode >...
  • Page 445 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Option: R&S SMW-B9, enabled in: ● "System Config > Fading/Baseband Config > Mode = Standard" with "Signal Out- puts = Analog Only" ● "System Config > Fading/Baseband Config > Mode = Advanced". Remote command: on page 1029 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:STATe...
  • Page 446 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Minimum Noise/System Bandwidth Ratio For "Additive Noise" and "Noise Only" modes, sets the ratio of minimum noise band- width to system bandwidth, as required by some standards. "Noise Bandwidth"...
  • Page 447 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal 6.2.4.2 Noise power/output results settings Access: ► Select "AWGN > Noise Power/Output Results". The available settings depend on the selected Mode. Settings: Show Powers For Output.................... 447 Set Noise Power Via....................
  • Page 448 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal This setting also influences: ● The way the interfering parameters are displayed, e.g. if the SNR value is defined as C/N or as S/N. ● The value units: –...
  • Page 449 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Carrier/Noise Ratio, Signal/Noise Ratio In "Additive Noise" and "CW Interferer" mode, sets the carrier/noise, signal/noise or signal/interferer ratio. Whether a configuration of C/N or S/N is enabled, depend on the selected output Show Powers For Output.
  • Page 450 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal ● In "Reference Mode > Noise", indicates the carrier power as derived from the entered C/N or S/N value. This indication corresponds to the "Level" value in the "Status bar".
  • Page 451 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal See also Figure 6-3. Remote command: on page 1032 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:POWer:NOISe Noise Power (Total Bandwidth) Displays the power of the noise signal in the total bandwidth in "Noise Only" and "Addi- tive Noise"...

  • Page 452: How To Configure The Noise Generator For Receiver Tests

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal Noise Bandwidth For "Additive Noise" and "Noise Only" modes and with activated AWGN generator, indicates the real noise bandwidth. See also Figure 6-2. Remote command: on page 1030 [:SOURce<hw>]:AWGN:BWIDth:NOISe? Resulting CW Frequency Offset In "CW Interferer"...
  • Page 453 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Adding noise to the signal ● "Set Noise Power Via = C/N" ● "Reference Mode = Carrier" ● "Carrier/Noise Ratio = 12.6 dB" The dialog confirms the required mean power of the interfering signal "Noise Power (System Bandwidth) = -82.5 dBm".

  • Page 454: Generating Impulsive And Phase Noise

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise 6.3 Generating impulsive and phase noise Additionally to superimposing an AWGN signal (Additive White Gaussian Noise) with selectable bandwidth on the generated digital baseband signal, you can also generate impusive noise and phase noise (R&S SMW-K810).

  • Page 455: About The Phase Noise

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise an even distribution within a burst. The burst duration is determined by the number of pulses in a burst (Pulses per Burst) and the limits for the spacing (Pulse Spacing Mini- mum/Pulse Spacing Maximum).

  • Page 456: Impulsive Noise Settings

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise The two lines in turn form a cascade connection, which corresponds to multiplying the two functions. The total characteristic of the SSB noise is hence calculated as follows: SSB(f) (z)*H (z)|...
  • Page 457 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise 3. Close the dialog and observe the incitation on the block diagram. The label in the AWGN block ("Ipls" or "I") changes to reflect that the impulsive noise generation is activated.
  • Page 458 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise Remote command: on page 1261 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:IMPulsive:CI Frame Duration Sets the time intervals at which the bursts occur. Remote command: on page 1261 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:IMPulsive:FRAMe Pulses per Burst Sets the number of noise pulses per burst, where the maximum number of pulses is Duration/0.25 μs.

  • Page 459: Phase Noise Settings

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise 6.3.5 Phase noise settings You can generate impulsive noise in the following configurations: ● Option: R&S SMW-B10 "System Config > Fading/Baseband Config > Mode = Standard" ●...
  • Page 460 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Generating impulsive and phase noise The graph on the left displays two color-coded curves: ● Yellow: the current profile, as set with the frequency/phase values. ● Red: the calculated filter shape incl. the amplitude values at the frequency points.

  • Page 461: Impairing The Signal

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal "SSB Shape Profile = User" indicates that no profile is loaded. Phase Noise Table Defines a single-sideband (SSB) shape profile. The shape profile is defined as a sequence of 5 points, each describing a frequency/ phase noise pair.
  • Page 462 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal Chapter 6.4.4, "Optimizing carrier leakage and sideband suppression", on page 468. The R&S SMW200A offers functions to impair an internal or external I/Q signal linearly: ● Impair I/Q samples for each I/Q stream. ●...
  • Page 463 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal Figure 6-7: Negative gain imbalance (left) and positive gain imbalance (right) in the I/Q constellation diagram 6.4.2.2 I and Q offset An I offset adds a constant value to all I amplitudes, leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged.

  • Page 464: Analog And Digital Impairments Settings

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal Figure 6-9: Positive quadrature offset in the I/Q constellation diagram 6.4.3 Analog and digital impairments settings You can add digital impairments to each internal generated I/Q stream and analog impairments to internal generated or externally supplied analog I/Q signals.
  • Page 465 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal ● For digital I/Q outputs, select "I/Q Digital" > "I/Q Digital Impairments". The dialog provides settings to configure I/Q digital impairments, like carrier leak- age, imbalance, quadrature offset and I/Q delays. If you connect an R&S SGT to one of the digital interfaces, the R&S SMW200A applies digital impairments at this R&S SGT.
  • Page 466 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal I Offset/Q Offset Sets a carrier offset (in percent) of the amplitudes (scaled to the peak envelope power (PEP)) for the I and/or Q signal component. An ideal I/Q modulator suppresses the car- rier offset completely (offset = 0 percent).
  • Page 467 ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal Remote command: For analog impairments: [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:IMPairment:QUADrature[: on page 1180 ANGLe] For digital impairments: on page 1180 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:BBMM<ch>:QUADrature[:ANGLe] on page 1180 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:FADer<ch>:QUADrature[:ANGLe] [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:IQOutput<ch>:QUADrature[:ANGLe] on page 1180 on page 1180 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:RF<ch>:QUADrature[:ANGLe] Skew Sets or displays the delay between the Q vector and the I vector of the corresponding...

  • Page 468: Optimizing Carrier Leakage And Sideband Suppression

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Impairing the signal Remote command: on page 1181 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:BBMM<ch>:POFFset on page 1181 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:FADer<ch>:POFFset on page 1181 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:IQOutput<ch>:POFFset on page 1181 [:SOURce]:BB:IMPairment:RF<ch>:POFFset 6.4.4 Optimizing carrier leakage and sideband suppression Applying linear I/Q impairments helps to improve signal quality in the following cases: ●...

  • Page 469: Frequency Response Correction

    ® Fading, predistorting and impairing the signal R&S SMW200A Applying digital predistortion 6.5 Frequency response correction Frequency response correction is a method, used to compensate the frequency response influence of the test setup, for example of the cables, power combiners, switches or mixers.

  • Page 470: Applying I/Q Vector Modulation

    ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A About the I/Q modulator 7 Applying I/Q vector modulation The R&S SMW200A offers I/Q modulation with an external analog I/Q signals, external digital signals, and the internally generated digital signal. For a description on applying digital impairments and applying nonlinear effects, see the following sections: ●...

  • Page 471: I/Q Modulator Settings

    ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings Defining the input signal of the I/Q modulator The table Table 7-1 provides an overview of the possible input signals and input con- nectors. Any of the specified input signals is processed by the I/Q modulator and out- put at the RF output.
  • Page 472 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings 2. Select "I/Q Mod" > "I/Q Settings" > "I/Q Modulator". The dialog provides the I/Q modulator settings, settings for optimized wideband modulation and settings for applying analog or digital impairments. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.10, "SOURce:IQ...
  • Page 473 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings System error correction of the I/Q modulator permits precise and repeatable measure- ments. If a temperature fluctuation of several degrees occurs, trigger the correction routine using the following: ● Select "I/Q Mod" > "I/Q Modulator" > "Adjust I/Q Modulator Current Frequency". ●...
  • Page 474 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings "Differential Analog I/Q Input" Option: R&S SMW-K739, for RF path A. Selects an external differential analog signal. If the instrument is equipped with one of the High frequency options and a "Freq > 19.5 GHz" is selected, the "Analog Wideband I/Q Input" is automatically selected.
  • Page 475 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings I/Q Wideband Activates/deactivates optimization for wideband modulation signals (higher I/Q modula- tion bandwidth). The modulation frequency response of the R&S SMW200A in the useful bandwidth is improved at the expense of poorer harmonic suppression. This improvement is ach- ieved by shifting the switching frequencies of the lowpass filters in the output section.
  • Page 476 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings "Auto" Requires a connected R&S SZU. The R&S SMW200A automatically sets the gain with optimized adjustment data from the R&S SZU. Remote command: For analog I/Q signal: on page 1215 [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:GAIN For digital I/Q signal: on page 1215...
  • Page 477 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A I/Q modulator settings Enables an automatic AM/AM predistortion of the non-linear RF chain. During RF linearization, disables "Digital Predistortions AM/AM and AM/PM" settings. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:DPD:LRF:STATe See user manual R&S ® SMW-K540, R&S ®...

  • Page 478: Optimizing I/Q Modulation Performance

    ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A Optimizing I/Q modulation performance 7.4 Optimizing I/Q modulation performance With its default settings, the I/Q Modulator provides a vector-modulated signal that is optimized for time sensitive measurements and lower noise. Adjusting the I/Q modulator settings helps you to improve signal quality for the follow- ing tasks: ●...
  • Page 479 ® Applying I/Q vector modulation R&S SMW200A Optimizing I/Q modulation performance To optimize for signals with high ACPR Optimize the I/Q modulator for signals with high adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR). For a given baseband signal (e.g. a 3GPP signal) and RF frequency, perform the fol- lowing iterative steps: 1.

  • Page 480: Configuring The Rf Signal

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A 8 Configuring the RF signal The vector signal generator R&S SMW200A generates RF signals with outstanding spectral purity within the frequency range from 100 kHz up to 67 GHz and with adjusta- ble signal level over a wide range. In addition to these real-time CW signals, you can generate RF signals from predefined lists and sweep signals that vary according to the frequency or amplitude curves.

  • Page 481: Required Options

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A How to access the RF settings – Sweep mode An RF or LF frequency and RF level sweep signal, processed continuously, step-by-step or individually and with selectable trigger modes. You can only run one sweep at a time.
  • Page 482 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A How to access the RF settings Table 8-1: RF block menu Menu item Content Described in ... RF Frequency RF On Activates RF signal output. Chapter 8.3, "How to activate RF signal output", on page 483 Connectors The instrument's customizable...

  • Page 483: How To Activate Rf Signal Output

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A How to activate RF signal output Menu item Content Described in ... Sensor Mapping Function for assigning R&S NRP Chapter 8.12.4.5, "NRP sensor power sensors to the four sensor mapping", on page 623 channels.

  • Page 484: How To Set The Frequency And Level

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A How to set the frequency and level RF State/RF ON......................484 PEP..........................484 RF output impedance....................484 RF State/RF ON Activates or deactivates the RF output. Acts as the [RF ON/OFF] key. Remote command: on page 954 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] on page 954 :OUTPut:ALL[:STATe]...

  • Page 485: References

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A How to set the frequency and level 8.4.1 References This section shows how the R&S SMW200A includes the factors of a downstream instrument to provide an optimal RF signal for the DUT. 8.4.1.1 Displayed RF frequency and level values with downstream instruments If you are working with a downstream instrument, like a mixer, a frequency multiplier, an amplifier or an attenuator, you can enter the parameter (offset, multiplier, amplitude)

  • Page 486: Rf Frequency Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF frequency settings The level displayed in the status bar includes "Amplitude", "Offset" and "Digital Attenu- ation". "Offset" represents a level value that impacts the RF signal outside the R&S SMW200A. In contrast, the "Digital attenuation" directly affects the level value at the RF output.
  • Page 487 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF frequency settings The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.7, "SOURce:FREQuency subsystem", on page 1201. Settings Frequency........................487 Offset...........................487 Multiplier........................488 Converter Mode......................488 Frequency Overrange....................489 └...
  • Page 488 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF frequency settings The "Frequency" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument. The frequency at the R&S SMW200A RF output is not changed. Chapter 8.4.1.1, "Displayed RF frequency and level values with downstream instruments", on page 485.
  • Page 489 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF frequency settings Remote command: n.a. Frequency Overrange This section applies to an R&S SZU100A IQ Upconverter connected to the corre- sponding path. An R&S SZU can support a wider frequency range than the range given in the specifi- cations document due to component and manufacturing tolerances.

  • Page 490: Rf Level Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF level settings Maximal Frequency ← Frequency Overrange Displays the upper frequency value of the connected R&S SZU100A. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CONVerter:EXTernal:OVERrange:FREQuency: on page 1212 MAX? User Variation Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the RF frequency or RF level with the rotary knob.
  • Page 491 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF level settings 2. Select "User Variation" to set the step width to be used when setting the RF level using the rotary knob. The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.18, "SOURce:POWer subsystem",...
  • Page 492 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF level settings Note: Suppressed values in the status bar For security concerns or certain operating modes, you can hide the frequency and level display in the status bar. ● The display has been disabled for security reasons. See: –...
  • Page 493 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF level settings "Normal" Generates an RF output signal with high signal to noise ratio as well as low distortion. "Low Noise" Optimizes the signal to noise ratio. "Low Distortion" Reduces distortion (harmonics) of the RF signal to a minimum. For more information, refer to the specifications document.
  • Page 494 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF level settings "Constant-Phase" This mode keeps the phase constant by coupling the digital attenua- tion directly to the level setting. Note: The coupling is only active when the I/Q modulator is in opera- tion.

  • Page 495: Rf Phase Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A RF phase settings Remote command: on page 1275 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] Offset Sets a level offset. This value represents the level shift of a downstream instrument, like, for example, an attenuator or an amplifier. The "Level" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting level, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument.

  • Page 496: Reference Oscillator

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator In the "RF Phase" tab, you can determine the delta phase value and reset the phase to this reference. The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.17, "SOURce:PHASe subsystem", on page 1267.

  • Page 497: Required Options

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator 8.8.1 Required options R&S SMW200A base unit equipped with the following options: ● 100 MHz, 1 GHz ultra low noise reference input and output (R&S SMW-K703) ● 1 MHz to 100 MHz flexible reference input (R&S SMW-K704) For more information, refer to the specifications document.
  • Page 498 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator Dependencies on RF hardware versions The supported external reference frequencies depend on the versions of the RF hard- ware components, the R&S SMW200A is equipped with. See: ● "Checking the installed hardware options" on page 1357 ●...
  • Page 499 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator This function prevents that no improper RF signal due to the missing external refer- ence signal is used for measurements. A message indicates that the RF output is deactivated. Remote command: on page 1286 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe] External Reference Frequency...

  • Page 500: Reference Output Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator "Wide" Synchronizes the internal oscillator to the external signal with the maximum possible bandwidth. This mode is the recommended standard mode and for precise refer- ence sources of high spectral purity. Note: If the frequency of the external reference signal is outside the locking range of the internal reference oscillator, spurs due to the dif- ference of the internal and external reference frequency are gener-...

  • Page 501: Adjustment Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator Settings: Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output............... 501 Show Connector......................501 Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output Selects frequency reference output signal for downstream instruments. The settings depend on the versions of the RF hardware, see Appendix: RF Hardware Versions, on page 1421.

  • Page 502: Using The Reference Frequency For Instruments Synchronization

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator Settings: Adjustment Active....................... 502 Adjustment Value......................502 Adjustment Active Selects the adjustment mode. "Off" Uses the calibrated internal reference frequency. "On" Allows you to apply a deviation to the internal reference frequency, according to your requirements.
  • Page 503 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator Connectors overview Use the "Show Connector" function to indicate the connector on the front/real panel: ● "REF IN/REF OUT" on page 49 ● 1GHz "REF IN/REF OUT" on page 49 ● "EFC"...
  • Page 504 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Reference oscillator 1 GHz at connector REF IN 1GHz and 1 GHz at REF OUT 1GHz ● External f = 1 GHz ● Source = "External" ● External Reference Frequency = "1 GHz" ●...

  • Page 505: Local Oscillator Coupling

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling Deriving 10 MHz from the external reference frequency 10 MHz reference frequency can be derived from the following external reference sig- nals: ● 10 MHz from internal oscillator locked to external input ●...
  • Page 506 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling LO coupling possibilities You can couple the LO signal as follows: ● "A Internal & A -> B Coupled" The R&S SMW200A uses the internal oscillator signal of path A also in path B. The reference frequency settings in path B have no effect and are thus disabled for editing.

  • Page 507: Required Options

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling 8.9.1 Required options The equipment layout for using the LO Coupling function is included in: ● Option Phase Coherence (R&S SMW-B90) 8.9.2 Phase coherence Phase coherence of RF signals designates a defined, constant delta phase between two or more RF carrier signals with the same frequency or a multiple of the frequency.

  • Page 508: Lo Coupling Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling 8.9.3 LO coupling settings Access: ► Select "RF > LO Coupling". The "LO Coupling" settings enable you to define the coupling of the local oscillator signal in the RF signal paths. The related remote commands are described in Chapter 14.19.7, "SOURce:FRE- Quency...
  • Page 509 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling "A External & B RF Off" Uses an LO input signal for path A. This setting requires that the applied signal corresponds to the set frequency in path A. You can route the signal to the LO OUT connec- tor and use it as an input for a downstream instrument.

  • Page 510: How To Configure Cascaded Instruments

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling Note: If your test setup consists of several cascaded Rohde & Schwarz instruments, always use an external oscillator signal and start the LO level adjustment with the first instrument. Continue in the order up to the last. Remote command: on page 931 :CALibration<hw>:LOSCillator:COUPling:LOCal?
  • Page 511 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling To configure LO coupling with cascaded instruments to achieve phase coher- ence The LO Coupling function can be used to generate beamforming signals. The test setups in the following examples represent possible applications and provide information about the coupling modes set in the signal generators.
  • Page 512 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling Example: Cascading three Rohde & Schwarz Signal Generators Figure 8-5: Set up of LO coupling with three Rohde & Schwarz Signal Generators Generator 1 = "Internal"; "LO OUT > Off" Generator 2 = "A External &...
  • Page 513 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Local oscillator coupling d) If the attenuation between the interconnection LO OUT and LO IN is more than 1 dB at the oscillator frequency, we recommend that you execute "Adjust LO Level Current Frequency". Note: Complete the adjustment procedure before you perform the adjustment on a subsequent instrument.

  • Page 514: Varying The Rf Signal In List Or Sweep Mode

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Example: Generating a beamformed signal with two Rohde & Schwarz Signal Generators This example shows a test setup with two generators, each equipped with two paths, like for example the R&S SMW200A or the R&S SMU200A.
  • Page 515 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode A signal generated with varying parameters scans a certain range of varying values of a parameter, with defined start and end points, and can be repeated cyclically. The R&S SMW200A supports two basic methods: ●...

  • Page 516: Signal Generation And Triggering In The Sweep And List Modes

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode The list mode is especially useful in high-speed measurements with fast changing frequency and level settings. Note that the shown diagrams represent the behaviour in theory. In real signal genera- tion, the instruments usually have a blank time when the frequency or level changes.
  • Page 517 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Each "Sweep" and "List" mode dialog provides also a "Reset" function that sets the sig- nal to the initial value or the beginning of the list. Depending on the selected trigger mode, the signal generation proceeds accordingly.
  • Page 518 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Table 8-2: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Auto mode (Sweep/List) Manual control mode: Remote commands "Auto" Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name RF frequency sweep :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate] :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO...
  • Page 519 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode ● Switches automatically to the next step when the Dwell time has elapsed. ● Stops signal generation at the set end value and waits for the subsequent trigger event.
  • Page 520 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Step / Extern Step mode (Sweep/List) Figure 8-11: Step / Extern Step mode (sweep / list ) ● The instrument generates the signal step-by-step. ●...
  • Page 521 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Table 8-4: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Step / Extern Step modes (Sweep/ List) Manual control mode: Remote commands "Step / Extern Step" Rohde &...
  • Page 522 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode ● Switches automatically to the next sweep step when the Dwell time has elapsed. If the end value is reached, signal generation continues with the next sweep cycle. ●...
  • Page 523 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode You can arbitrarily select a value within the range of the start and stop values by setting the frequency, power or index using the corresponding remote control com- mand.

  • Page 524: About Sweep Mode

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode You can use the "Retrace" function if "Sweep > Mode = Single/External Single" and "Shape = Sawtooth", see: ● "Shape" on page 535 ● "Mode"...
  • Page 525 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Table 8-7: Variables that are used in the following formulas Variable Description Sweep range Defined frequency or level value range Defined center frequency CENTer Defined extend of the sweep range SPAN Frequency offset...

  • Page 526: Sweep Signal Shapes

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode It is possible to set f > f and f < f , so that even a negative value is per- STARt STOP STARt STOP mitted for the "Span".

  • Page 527: About List Mode

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Figure 8-14: Sweep signal sawtooth shape 1 = Start value 2 = Stop value 3 = Step size ● Triangle The sweep sequence resembles a triangle. One sweep runs from start to stop value frequency and back.
  • Page 528 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Configuration and operation of list mode signals The parameters configuring the RF signal are defined in a list (table) and stored in a file. Creating and handling lists List files can be created in the following ways: ●...

  • Page 529: Significant Parameters And Functions

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 8.10.4 Significant parameters and functions This section provides some basic parameters, settings and functions that affect the operating modes CW, list and sweep, that means at all frequency and level transitions of the RF signal.
  • Page 530 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Blanking The instrument applies blanking, which temporarily turns off the RF signal when the frequency or level changes, until the signal has settled to a stable state. If you disable this blanking, the signal is not turned off during transition, but a tempo- rary loss of power still occurs while the instrument adjusts the hardware.

  • Page 531: Sweep Mode Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode When to use the "Learn List Mode Data" function The instrument performs the learning process in the following situations: ● RF state is on (prerequisite) ●...
  • Page 532 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode The remote commands required to define these settings are described in: ● Chapter 14.19.7, "SOURce:FREQuency subsystem", on page 1201 ● Chapter 14.19.18, "SOURce:POWer subsystem", on page 1268 ●...
  • Page 533 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa. Remote command: on page 1206 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE State (RF level sweep) Activates RF level sweep signal generation.
  • Page 534 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Mode Selects the sweep mode. Chapter 8.10.1, "Signal generation and triggering in the sweep and list modes", on page 516. "Auto" Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal directly after acti- vating the sweep mode.
  • Page 535 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode LF frequency sweep: on page 1242 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace Shape Selects the waveform shape of the sweep signal. See also Chapter 8.10.2.2, "Sweep signal shapes", on page 526. "Sawtooth"...
  • Page 536 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Remote command: RF frequency sweep: on page 1296 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl RF level sweep: on page 1294 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl RF combined sweep: on page 1301 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:DWELl LF frequency sweep: on page 1241 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl Trigger Slope...
  • Page 537 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 8.10.5.2 Frequency range settings Access: 1. Select for example "RF" > "Sweep / List" > "RF Frequency Sweep" 2. Select for example "Frequency Range". Table 8-9: Range settings dialog: Examples of RF Frequency and RF Combined Sweep dialogs >...
  • Page 538 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Remote command: on page 1209 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN Spacing In "RF and LF Frequency Sweep" mode, "Spacing" selects the mode for calculating the frequency interval, which increases or decreases the current frequency at each step. To determine the step size, select the parameter Step Linear/Step Logarithmic.
  • Page 539 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 2. Select for example "Level Range". Table 8-10: Range settings dialog: Examples of RF Level and RF Combined Sweep dialogs > "Level Range" > "Frequency / Level Range" Settings Start Level / Stop Level....................
  • Page 540 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Step Sets the step width for the RF level sweep in dB. The "RF level sweep" mode increases or decreases the level value linearly by the set value.

  • Page 541: List Mode Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode "Constant-Phase" This mode keeps the phase constant by coupling the digital attenua- tion directly to the level setting. Note: The coupling is only active when the I/Q modulator is in opera- tion.
  • Page 542 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode In the "General" tab, you can configure the trigger and dwell time modes for list processing and activate signal generation. Settings State..........................542 Current Index......................542 Mode...........................
  • Page 543 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode "Auto" Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of the list from the beginning to the end. The list steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time.
  • Page 544 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Run Mode Selects whether the instrument generates the signal by processing the list directly, or by learning and replaying the data. "Learned (Frozen RF Settings)" Generates the signal with the previously learned and stored data from the temporary memory.
  • Page 545 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 8.10.6.2 List mode data settings Access: 1. Select "RF" > "Sweep / List" > "List mode". 2. Select "List Mode Data". This dialog contains the parameters required for creating and editing lists, activat- ing the learning function and selecting the list processing mode.
  • Page 546 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 8.10.6.3 Import/export settings Access: 1. Select "RF" > "Sweep / List" > "List Mode". 2. Select "List Mode Data" > "Im-/Export". The "Im-/Export" dialog provides the parameters for importing or exporting files with user data in standard ASCII *.txt or *.csv file format.
  • Page 547 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode "Extension" Selects *.csv or *.txt format. "Decimal Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the Point" ASCII data with floating-point numerals. "Column Separator"...

  • Page 548: List Editor

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 8.10.7 List editor The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a build-in list editor for defining the corresponding value pairs. The table and navigation functions of the UCOR and list mode editors have the same structure and are therefore summarized below.
  • Page 549 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode Access to "Edit User Correction Data": ► "RF" > "RF Level" > "User Correction" > "Edit User Cor. Data" The editor for user correction data provides a table with RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions.
  • Page 550 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode "Frequency (Hz)" Sets the frequency values. Remote command: on page 1249 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency on page 1196 "Power (dBm)" (list mode data table) Sets the level values. Remote command: on page 1252 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer...

  • Page 551: How To Generate A Signal In List Or Sweep Mode

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode To fill the table, select "Fill". Note: Once you enter a value or fill a column, the editor automatically adds preset val- ues in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving.
  • Page 552 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 6. In the "Frequency Range" tab, set "Start Freq > 200 MHz" and "Stop Freq > 600 MHz". (Alternatively you can set "Center Freq > 400 MHz" and "Span > 400 MHz".) 7.

  • Page 553: Analog Modulations

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations To configure the list mode and start signal generation 1. In the "General" tab, select "List Mode > Auto". 2. Select "Dwell Time Mode > From List". 3. Select "List Mode Data > Learn List Mode Data". 4.
  • Page 554 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations The instrument provides the following internal modulation signal sources: ● An LF generator ● A multifunction generator and a noise generator ● A high performance pulse generator The R&S SMW200A generates both the carrier (LF) and RF frequencies, provides sine or square waves, waveforms with rising and falling edges (triangle, sawtooth and tra- pezoid), and various noise signals, such as a white noise with selectable bandwidth and level distribution.

  • Page 555: Required Options

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations 8.11.1 Required options The equipment layout for generating the analog modulation signals includes per signal path: ● Option frequency (e.g. R&S SMW-B1003) ● Option baseband main module, one/two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13/-B13T) or option wideband baseband main module two I/Q paths to RF (R&S SMW-B13XT) To perform for example I/Q modulation and an analog frequency or phase modula- tion in one path simultaneously, option R&S SMW-B13T/B13XT must be installed.
  • Page 556 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations 8.11.2.2 External signal sources For the input of an external amplitude, frequency or phase modulation signal, you can assign the signal at the EXT connectors. External pulse modulation signals are fed via the global connectors, assigned in the "Global Connector Settings"...
  • Page 557 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations The following modulations are configured: ● Path A (first image) Amplitude modulation that is performed with an internally generated trapezoid wave signal and a superposed external signal. ● Path B (second image) Amplitude modulation, performed with the sine signal of the LF Generator 2 and a superposed noise signal.
  • Page 558 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations 1, 9 = Modulation dialogs of path A, and path B 2, 5 = external input connectors 1 and 2 3, 4 = LF output connectors 1 and 2 6, 10 = Selection between FM and ɸM 7, 11 = modulation signal sources used in path A, and path B 8, 12 = assigned modulation signals to the LF outputs 1 and 2 This tab reflects the signal sources of the analog modulations AM, FM and ɸM as in...
  • Page 559 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations In the first image, both signals selected for the amplitude modulation in path A are combined. The instrument performs the amplitude modulation with this signal and also provides it at the LF output. The second image shows the similar configuration set up for the phase modulation.
  • Page 560 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Example: Assigning two independent composite modulation signals to the LF outputs This example shows the following configuration: ● Path A Amplitude modulation performed with an internally generated square wave signal and a superposed external signal. This composite LF signal is also assigned to the output LF OUT x 2.
  • Page 561 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations In the tab of path A (see the first image), you can see the settings of the modulations in path A. The signal coming from B is only displayed. Vice versa, the tab in the path B (second image) shows the configuration of the modulations of this path, but also the signal coming from A.
  • Page 562 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Triangle 1 = Triangle rise 2 = Triangle period Trapezoid 1 = Trapezoid rise 2 = Trapezoid high 3 = Trapezoid fall 4 = Trapezoid period To configure the associated parameters of a signal shape, see "Shape"...

  • Page 563: Activating Analog Modulations

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Single 1 = Pulse delay 2 = Pulse width 2 = Pulse Period Double 1 = Pulse width 2 = Double pulse delay 3 = Double pulse width 4 = Pulse period 8.11.3 Activating analog modulations 1.

  • Page 564: Modulation Settings

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations 8.11.4 Modulation settings Access: ► Select "RF > Analog Modulation". The "Modulation" dialog contains all functions and settings to configure the analog modulations, the LF signal sources for performing a modulation, and the LF signal output.
  • Page 565 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations State Option: R&S SMW-B9 - enabled in "System Config > Mode = Standard". Option: R&S SMW-B10 - enabled in "System Config > Mode = Standard/Advanced". Activates pulse modulation. Remote command: on page 1063 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe Source Selects between the internal "Pulse Generator"...
  • Page 566 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Polarity Pulse Input Sets the polarity of the active slope of a pulse input signal, that is the external pulse modulation signal. Remote command: on page 1065 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity Threshold USER4-6 Input/Threshold Pulse Input Sets the high/low threshold in volts for the signal at the USER4-6 connectors.
  • Page 567 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations State Option: R&S SMW-B9 - enabled in "System Config > Mode = Standard". Option: R&S SMW-B10 - enabled in "System Config > Mode = Standard/Advanced". Activates a modulation. Note: Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously. For more information, refer to the specifications document.
  • Page 568 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations A warning message indicates this situation, too. For more information, refer to the specifications document. Remote command: on page 1053 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation] Deviation Mode ← FM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both paths and determines the mode for fixing the total deviation.
  • Page 569 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations "Low Noise" Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM devi- ation is reduced. For more information, refer to the specifications document. Remote command: on page 1055 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE...
  • Page 570 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Remote command: on page 1059 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:SUM Ratio Path2/Path1 ← PhiM settings Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in per cent. Example: If the deviation in path1 is 10 rad and the ratio is 50%, the deviation in path 2 is auto- matically set to 5 rad.
  • Page 571 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Deviation Mode ← AM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both paths and determines the mode for fixing the total deviation. The deviation sum of both paths is 100% in total. When the sum is exceeded, the R&S SMW200A reports a settings conflict, but does not change the settings.
  • Page 572 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations The "Pulse Generator" tab contains the settings for creating the pulse modulation signal internally. Pulse generator > general settings Access: ► Select "RF" > "Analog Modulation" > "Pulse Generator". Settings Pulse Mode.........................
  • Page 573 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Trigger Mode Selects between continuous triggering or triggering initiated by a trigger event from an external signal. "Auto" Generates the internal modulation signal continuously. "Ext Single" Generates a single pulse signal, triggered by an external signal. "Ext Triggered"...
  • Page 574 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations "Ext Gated" Generates the signal triggered by an external gate signal. Example: Generation of single pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Sin- gle") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Gated" = External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive slope is active) = Sync signal = Pulse signal...
  • Page 575 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Remote command: on page 1063 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh Pulse Delay Sets the pulse delay. The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts. The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation.
  • Page 576 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations The height of the bars corresponds to the selected amplitude of the pulse signal. Figure 8-18: Pulse Graph - single pulse 1 = Pulse Period 2 = Pulse Delay 3 = Pulse Width 4 = Pulse Zoom Position User Manual 1175.6632.02 ─...
  • Page 577 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Figure 8-19: Pulse Graph - double pulse 1 = Pulse Period 2 = Pulse Width 3 = Double Pulse Delay 4 = Double Pulse Width 5 = Pulse Zoom Position Zooming You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the graph in more detail: ●...
  • Page 578 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations In the "Sources" tab, you can configure an LF modulation signal for performing analog modulations. It includes the setting parameters of the internal LF-and multi- function generators, the noise generator, and an external signal source. To select an external signal, you can directly access the settings of the Connectors dialog.
  • Page 579 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Sweep mode settings for access. ● "Analog Modulation Sources" displays the current state (read-only). If it is turned on, this dialog provides the varying sweep frequency, see Current Frequency. Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa.
  • Page 580 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Trapezoid Rise / Fall Sets the time required for the trapezoid signal to change from low level to high level, and vice versa. Modulation signal waveforms. Remote command: on page 1239 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE on page 1239 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL...
  • Page 581 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Impedance Sets the impedance for the externally supplied signal. Remote command: on page 1213 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch> Bandwidth Displays the maximum bandwidth of the external LF signal. Remote command: on page 1234 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth? Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
  • Page 582 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations You can set the bandwidth between 100 kHz and 10 MHz in 100 KHz steps. The noise signal is generated within the set frequency bandwidth. The noise level in the frequency band is defined by "Noise Level (System Bandwidth)". Remote command: on page 1259 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth...
  • Page 583 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Source Determines the LF signal to be synchronized of the corresponding path. "LF Generator A1/2, B1/2" Selects one of internally generated LF signals. "AM A/B" Selects the AM signal. "FM/ΦM A/B" Selects the signal also used by the frequency or phase modulations.
  • Page 584 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Settings: Noise Density......................584 Noise Level......................... 584 Noise Density Indicates the level of the noise signal for a bandwidth of 1 Hz (relative). Remote command: on page 1260 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel<ch>:RELative? Noise Level Indicates the level of the noise signal per Hz within the total bandwidth (absolute).

  • Page 585: How To Generate A Modulated Signal

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations Blue color = Active output signal (AM and FM) Gray color = Inactive output signal (LF Out) Miniature graph = Indicates an active source Connectors = Indicate a connector (e.g. external signal) is involved in the path of the signal The "Overview"...
  • Page 586 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Analog modulations 2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 2 GHz". 3. Set "Level = -20 dBm". To configure the modulation signal (LF generator) 1. Select "RF" > "Analog Modulation" > "Modulation Source". 2.

  • Page 587: Improving Level Performance

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance To enable pulse modulation 1. Select the "Pulse Modulation" tab. 2. Set "State = I" to activate pulse modulation. 3. Set "RF > On" to enable signal output. 8.12 Improving level performance To adjust the RF output signal to specific needs in your application optimally, the R&S SMW200A provides different functions: ●...

  • Page 588: Attenuator

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.1 Attenuator About the attenuator The step attenuator is either an electronic or mechanical device. Instruments with fre- quency options up to 13 GHz use an electronic step attenuator, providing fast and wear free level settings.
  • Page 589 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.16, "OUTPut subsystem", on page 953 and Chapter 14.19.18, "SOURce:POWer subsystem", on page 1268. Settings Mode........................... 589 Attenuation........................
  • Page 590 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Remote command: on page 1273 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:AATTenuation? Level Range Shows the interruption-free range of the level that you can use in the selected mode. Remote command: on page 956 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer? on page 956 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer? RF OFF Mode Determines the state of the step attenuator, when the RF signal is switched off.

  • Page 591: Alc - Automatic Level Control

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.2 ALC - automatic level control The R&S SMW200A is equipped with an automatic level control (ALC) unit to obtain best RF level accuracy. About ALC ALC is an adaptive control system to stabilize the RF output level. It continuously moni- tors the current level and adjusts it to keep a steady state over temperature and time.
  • Page 592 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Starts with the associated value of the internal level table and then activates the automatic level control. This mode achieves maximum level accuracy and fast set- ting times. The R&S SMW200A displays the level control setting as a status message in the info line.
  • Page 593 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance "On" Activates ALC permanently. "Off (Sample & Hold)" Deactivates the ALC, but allows you to recalibrate the level at each frequency and level change. The value remains up to the next change.
  • Page 594 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Driver Amplifier Selects the switching state of the driver amplifier, that means the switchable amplifier or step attenuator at the output. "Auto" Switches the step attenuator automatically. "On/Off" The driver amplifier is switched on, or off respectively. "On (maximum Gain)"...

  • Page 595: User Correction

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.3 User correction The R&S SMW200A supports a correction function to compensate external losses, caused, for example, by the RF cable, to achieve a precise target input level at the DUT.
  • Page 596 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Figure 8-21: Understanding the principle of user correction = Device under test Compo- = Designation of all components between the measurement equipment and the DUT, e.g. nents cables = Power sensor, e.g. R&S NRP, connected at the DUT's input and the USB connector of the R&S SMW200A = Power sensor measures the level over a frequency range, where the collected values corre- spond to the losses caused by the components between the R&S SMW200A and the DUT...
  • Page 597 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance UCOR file format Files containing correction data are simple files in text or comma-separated value (CSV) file format. The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.ucor. The file contains a list of correction values, one row per frequency and correction value pair;...
  • Page 598 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.3.1 User correction settings Access: 1. Select "RF" > "RF Level" > "User Correction". 2. If you already have created a file with user correction data: a) Select "UCOR Data" > navigate to the file "*.uco" > "Select". b) Proceed with step 3.
  • Page 599 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance The R&S SMW200A displays the status icon "Lev Ucor" in the status bar. User correction cannot be activated simultaneously with absolute level compensation based on user-defined frequency response values. These functions exclude each other;...
  • Page 600 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.3.2 List editor The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a build-in list editor for defining the corresponding value pairs. The table and navigation functions of the UCOR and list mode editors have the same structure and are therefore summarized below.
  • Page 601 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Access to "Edit User Correction Data": ► "RF" > "RF Level" > "User Correction" > "Edit User Cor. Data" The editor for user correction data provides a table with RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions.
  • Page 602 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance "Frequency (Hz)" Sets the frequency values. Remote command: on page 1249 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency on page 1196 "Power (dBm)" (list mode data table) Sets the level values. Remote command: on page 1252 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer "Correction Value (dBm)"...
  • Page 603 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance To fill the table, select "Fill". Note: Once you enter a value or fill a column, the editor automatically adds preset val- ues in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving.
  • Page 604 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 3. Select "Edit User Cor. Data > Fill With Sensor...". This dialog contains parameters for filling a table automatically with sensor read- ings. To fill the table, select "Execute". For information on power sensors and how to use them, see Chapter 8.12.5, "Improv- ing the RF signal performance",...
  • Page 605 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance "Include Zeroing" Performs a zeroing procedure before acquiring the user correction data to improve precision. No signal is applied to the sensor during zeroing. RF output is tempo- rarily switched off during that time. When unchecked, the zeroing procedure is skipped.
  • Page 606 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance ● "RF" > "Sweep / List" > "List mode". ● "RF" > "RF Level" > "User Correction". 2. Select "Import/Export". Figure 8-22: Im-/Export dialog (example with UCOR settings) The "Import/Export" dialog contains all functions and settings to import externally created list data or to export it accordingly.

  • Page 607: Using Power Sensors

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Remote command: on page 1257 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 1257 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 1257 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 1200 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 1200 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 1200 Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination In "Mode >...
  • Page 608 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance For information on the various possibilities of interoperability between Rohde & Schwarz power sensors and Rohde & Schwarz signal generators, see the application note 1GP141. R&S NRP power sensors are highly accurate standalone measuring devices, suitable for a wide range of applications.
  • Page 609 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance The R&S NRP-Z5 USB sensor hub (high-speed USB 2.0) can host up to 4 R&S NRP sensors. Requires additional cables, depending on the used output connector of the hub. Choose one of the following: –...
  • Page 610 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance On connection, the R&S SMW200A immediately starts the measurement of the R&S NRP power sensor. If you preset the instrument ([PRESET] key or *RST), the R&S SMW200A stops the measurement. The connection and the mapping of the power sensors remain.
  • Page 611 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance The averaging factor is selected automatically and so that the sensor's intrinsic noise (two standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content. ● Depending on the R&S NRP power sensor type, the manual setting of the filter length varies in resolution.
  • Page 612 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Additional information See the Rohde & Schwarz website www.rohde-schwarz.com, section "Power Meters & Voltmeters" for: ● R&S NRP power sensor manual. ● Information on the R&S NRP-Z5 sensor hub and the available accessories. ●...
  • Page 613 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Example: How to set up a closed loop power control RF level Input level x dB Amplifier Coupler Signal generator Power Measured level sensor Figure 8-23: Example of a test setup with NRP power control The signal generator applies the RF output signal to an amplifier and to the DUT.
  • Page 614 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance In this dialog you can configure the parameters of the power control setup for the selected power sensor. The side tabs enable you to configure the settings for each path separately. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.19.18, "SOURce:POWer...
  • Page 615 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Remote command: on page 1280 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:SELect Measured Level Indicates the current reading of the selected power sensor. Remote command: on page 964 :READ<ch>[:POWer]? on page 965 :SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] Target Level Specifies the nominal level expected at the input of the sensor. The signal generator adjusts the output power accordingly, to meet the target value at the sensor input, and thus the power required at the DUT.
  • Page 616 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance the power control locks and tries to achieve the target level. Readings outside the range are not considered. Remote command: on page 1278 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:CRANge Delay Time Sets a waiting period between the level adjustment of the generator and the next mea- surement of the power sensor.
  • Page 617 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance "Uninterrupted" Suppresses blanking at level transitions. Frequency transitions can lead to an RF level blanking due to hardware-specific switching points. This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument. The step attenuator is fixed.
  • Page 618 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.4.4 NRP sensor configuration Access: ► Select "RF" > "RF Measurement" > "NRP Sensor Configuration". In this dialog you can configure the parameters for each mapped R&S NRP power sensor in separate tabs. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.17, "SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt...
  • Page 619 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Aperture Time......................622 S-Parameter........................622 Enable Logging......................622 Sensor type and serial number The side tab label indicates type and serial number of an R&S NRP power sensor and its mapping index. Level (Peak) / Level (Average) values display the current readings of the sensor.
  • Page 620 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Remote command: on page 967 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe Use Frequency Of Selects the source for measurement. "RF" Assigns one of the RF signals of the R&S SMW200A. The R&S SMW200A transfers the RF frequency and level settings to the R&S power sensor automatically.
  • Page 621 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance "Auto" Selects the filter length automatically and adjusts it to the measured value. The value is indicated with the parameter Filter Length. When high output power is applied, the filter length and therefore the measurement time can be short.
  • Page 622 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Remote command: on page 968 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe Default Aperture Time The sensor default setting is sufficient. Disable this parameter to specify a user-defined aperture time per sensor, if, for example, the readings vary. To obtain stable readings, set the Aperture Time exactly to one modulation period.
  • Page 623 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8.12.4.5 NRP sensor mapping The "NRP Sensor Mapping" lists the sensors detected by the instrument. Any R&S NRP sensor that supports the USB legacy protocol and is connected to one of the USB interfaces, is detected automatically and added to the list.
  • Page 624 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance Sensor Mapping List Shows the sensors that are connected to the R&S SMW200A. The table informs on the sensor type, specific features and the installed sensor firm- ware. It also shows the interface the sensor is connected to, including the communica- tion protocol and the mapping index.

  • Page 625: Improving The Rf Signal Performance

    ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance "Add LAN Sensor" Adds a detected R&S NRP sensor connected in the LAN to the list of sensors, including its device ID or name and its serial number. Remote command: on page 961 :SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor Add USBTMC Sensor...
  • Page 626 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 3. If the sensor is not detected automatically, select "Scan > Start". The instrument scans the network and the USB connections for connected sensors and lists all detected R&S NRP sensors in the mapping table. 4.
  • Page 627 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 2. Select "UCOR Data" > "UCOR Data.." 3. Create a file: "New" > Filename and confirm with "OK". 4. Select the new file with "Select". 5. Select "Edit UCOR Data...". 6.
  • Page 628 ® Configuring the RF signal R&S SMW200A Improving level performance 8. Select "Fill with Sensor". The "Fill User Correction Data With Sensor" dialog provides an overview of the sensor configuration. 9. Select "Execute". The R&S SMW200A successively sets each frequency point, reads the measured power of the sensor and fills in the value in the correction table.

  • Page 629: Monitoring Signal Characteristics

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics 9 Monitoring signal characteristics The R&S SMW200A is a highly configurable signal generator with versatile routing possibilities and level settings distributed over several dialogs. You can optimize the signal generation process and monitor signal parameters during signal routing through the instrument.

  • Page 630: Vector Diagram

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Table 9-1: Graphics modes overview Graphics modes Domain Measurement instrument I/Q diagram Time Oscilloscope (standard mode) Vector diagram Time Oscilloscope (XY mode) Constellation diagram Time Oscilloscope (XY mode) Eye diagram Time Oscilloscope (triggered to symbol clock and showing repetitive traces)

  • Page 631: Constellation Diagram

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Figure 9-2: Vector diagram (64QAM) X-axis, Y-axis = amplitudes of the signal components, scaled to the peak envelope power; where minimum scaled amplitude = -1, maximum scaled amplitude = +1 Application: To analyze the transition between the various states of modulation map- ping, especially with linear modulations like MSK, QPSK or QAM.

  • Page 632: Eye Diagram

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Figure 9-3: Constellation diagram (64QAM) X-axis, Y-axis = amplitudes of the signal components, scaled to the peak envelope power; where minimum scaled amplitude = -1, maximum scaled amplitude = +1 Application: To classify modulation.
  • Page 633 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics The display width is normalized for 2 symbols. It uses one-symbol "eye opening" in the center of the display and 1/2-symbols to the left and right of the center eye for captur- ing time transitions.

  • Page 634: Power Spectrum

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Signal acquisition points: See Table 9-2. Power spectrum The power spectrum displays the signal spectrum which is calculated from the I/Q sig- nal with fast Fourier transform (FFT). The power density over frequency is displayed. Figure 9-6: Power spectrum diagram of a 5 MHz LTE signal with enabled reference curve (blue) "FFT points"...

  • Page 635: Display Functions

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Figure 9-7 shows an example for locations of signal acquisition points. Figure 9-7: Block diagram with graphical signal display and signal acquisition points The available signal acquisition points depend on the selected configuration (signal routing), see Chapter 4, "Signal routing and system configuration",...

  • Page 636: Graphics Configuration Settings

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics In the graphical display, the markers and their values (for example time or frequency) are displayed as usual. Single marker indication Delta marker indication ● 1 = delta marker ● 2 = result of the marker function, i.e.
  • Page 637 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Figure 9-8: Graphics configuration dialog 2. To display a certain characteristic of the signal, use the parameter "Mode". 3. To select suitable signal acquisition points, use the parameter "Source". 4. To enable the graphical signal display, select "Add". A thumbnail of the graphical signal display is shown in the taskbar.
  • Page 638 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Stream.........................638 Length........................638 Full Scale (dBFS)......................638 Trigger Source......................639 Sample Rate Mode..................... 639 Sample Rate....................... 639 Add..........................640 Apply Changes......................640 Remove........................640 Graphical Diagrams Table The active graphical signal displays are listed in the table at the top of the dialog. Mode Sets the graphics mode, see Chapter 9.1, "Monitoring baseband signal characteris-...
  • Page 639 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics "Off" The frequency average of the displayed power (frequency domain) agrees with the average power in the time domain. The y-axis shows the power distribution in dB/Hz. Remote command: on page 1185 [:SOURce]:BB:GRAPhics:FFTFscale Trigger Source Defines the trigger for signal recording.

  • Page 640: Graphical Signal Display Settings

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Adds a graphical signal display (as set in the "Graphics Configuration" dialog) to the taskbar/graphical diagrams table. Remote command: on page 1184 [:SOURce]:BB:GRAPhics:ADD Apply Changes Enables the current settings for the selected graphical signal display. Remove Removes the selected graphical signal display from the taskbar/graphical diagrams table.
  • Page 641 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics Settings: Configure........................641 Stop/Run........................641 Zoom Out........................641 Reference Curves....................... 641 Display Units....................... 641 Show / Hide marker.....................641 Reference Curve......................641 Configure Opens the "Graphics Configuration" dialog, see Chapter 9.1.3, "Graphics configuration settings", on page 636.

  • Page 642: Checking The Generated Signal Graphically

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics "Reference trace" on page 636. "Reference Curves Table" Lists the configured reference curves and their current state. To change a curve, select it. Enters the name of a new reference curve "Name"...
  • Page 643 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics For more information, see Chapter 3.3.2, "Generating a digitally modulated signal", on page 57. Figure 9-11: Used modulation type Configure the graphical signal display 1. Select the wave icon: The "Graphics Configuration" dialog opens. 2.
  • Page 644 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics A new thumbnail (minimized view) indicating the constellation diagram appears in the "Taskbar". 5. To enlarge the constellation diagram, select it. The displayed constellation diagram confirms the a QPSK offset modulation. Figure 9-12: Constellation diagram of a WCDMA-3GPP (QPSK 45°...
  • Page 645 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics 2. In the "Constellation Diagram", select "Configure". The "Graphics Configuration" dialog opens. 3. Add a vector diagram with signal acquisition point "Stream" 4. Enlarge the vector diagram. The vector diagram rotates with 1 Hz. Figure 9-13: Rotating vector diagram 5.
  • Page 646 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics The vector diagram changes. 2. Preset the rolloff factor. To set and verify path gain and routing The power spectrum diagram is a suitable representation of the effect of these set- tings.
  • Page 647 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics 2. Select "Baseband > Baseband Offsets > Baseband > Frequency Offset = 5 MHz". The power spectrum confirms the shifted WCDMA-3GPP signal. Figure 9-14: Power spectrum with shifted WCDMA-3GPP signal and marker for measuring the offset 3.
  • Page 648 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics The power spectrum diagram displays two signals, an attenuated GSM signal and the shifted WCDMA signal. Figure 9-15: Power spectrum with attenuated GSM signal and shifted WCDMA signal At the RF output, the GSM signal appears attenuated with 15 dB only because the power level is measured with a large bandwidth.
  • Page 649 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics 9. Select "Baseband B > State > Off" to disable the GSM signal To zoom into a diagram In an enlarged diagram: 1. Use the one-finger zoom to zoom with a fixed zoom factor. 2.
  • Page 650 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics To observe the effect of fading We assume that a WCDMA-3GPP signal is generated and you observe the power spectrum diagram. The display confirms the WCDMA-3GPP spectrum with a maximum level at around -30 dBm.
  • Page 651 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Monitoring baseband signal characteristics 3. Select "Noise Power / Output Results > Carrier/Noise Ratio = 30 dB". 4. Select "AWGN > State > On" 5. Observe the power spectrum display. In addition to the changing level from fading, the power spectrum shows a noise floor with constant level.

  • Page 652: Querying Information On The Baseband Power Levels

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels 3. Select "Save". The instrument creates a screenshot of the current screen and stores it in a file with a predefined filename in the default user directory /var/user/. Chapter 11.10, "Creating screenshots of current settings", on page 732.
  • Page 653 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels ● Chapter 4.4.2, "I/Q stream mapper settings", on page 135 ● Chapter 5.14, "Shifting the baseband signal", on page 429 ● Chapter 6.2, "Adding noise to the signal", on page 436 Baseband leveling principle...
  • Page 654 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels Figure 9-17: Overview of the acquisition points (source) and output points = Baseband A/B/C/D = Fading Input A/B/C/D = Fading Output A/B/C/D = AWGN Input A/B/C/D = Stream A/B/C/D 6, 10 = output: RF A/B (A/B) 7, 9 = output: I/Q Out 1/2 (C/D) = output: Dig I/Q Out BBMM 1/2 (A/B), FADER 3/4 (C/D)
  • Page 655 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels Enabled power offsets are considered (see also Chapter 9.2.2.4, "Understanding the displayed measurement results", on page 656). 9.2.2.3 Selecting a suitable acquisition method The provided measurement results are based on signal measurement with different acquisition methods.
  • Page 656 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels In multi-gated acquisition mode, the measured values of different gates are dis- played as separate submeasurements, i.e. not combined in one result as in the gated mode. However, the submeasurement results for the same gate index performed in consecutive repetition windows are combined to smoothen RMS and peak power depending on measurement duration / sweep time.
  • Page 657 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels Example: Results calculation and interpretation at the analog I/Q Out Enable the following settings in the "I/Q Analog > Analog I/Q Output Settings" dialog: In the "Setup > General > Baseband Powers Simulation" dialog, enable a power mea- surement with the following properties: ●...

  • Page 658: Baseband Power Settings

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels 9.2.3 Baseband power settings Access: ► Select "Taskbar > System Config > Setup > General > Baseband Powers". The dialog provides a summarized information on the important baseband level parameters, like power level and peak power (PEP) of selectable acquisition points.
  • Page 659 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels "Progress %" Indicates the status of an initiated measurement. Remote command: on page 1190 [:SOURce]:BB:MEASurement:POWer:PROGress? Source/Output Determines the start and endpoint for the power measurement, i.e. determines the influence of which source signal is measured at which output point.
  • Page 660 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels In "Acquisition > Gated", the value of the parameter "Sweep Time/Duration" relates to the effective time during that the signal is measured; the duration is determined by the corresponding marker/markers signal (high values) and not to as an absolute duration/ sweep time.

  • Page 661: Measuring Baseband Power Levels

    ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels To retrieve information on the status of an initiated measurement, observe the "Pro- gress" indication in the BB Powers Summary List and the Running/Stopped indication. Remote command: on page 1188 [:SOURce]:BB:MEASurement:POWer:ADD on page 1190...
  • Page 662 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels 3. In the taskbar, select "System Config > Setup > Baseband Powers" to perform the following: a) "Source > Baseband A" b) "Output > RF A" c) "Acquisition > Continuous" d) "Sweep Time = 1 s"...
  • Page 663 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels The signals of "Baseband A" and "Baseband B" are summed and routed to the RF A output. 6. In the taskbar, select "System Config > Setup > Baseband Powers", enable a sec- ond analogical measurement with "Source >...
  • Page 664 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels Both baseband signals are summed but the signal of "Baseband A" is 3 dB higher than "Baseband B" in the second path. 8. Open the "Baseband Powers" dialog, select "Start", and compare the measure- ment results.
  • Page 665 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels b) Select "IEEE 802.11 WLAN > General > State > On". c) Select "IEEE 802.11 WLAN > Marker" and enable two marker signals, each one indicating of the PPDU part of the frame block: ●...
  • Page 666 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels d) Select "Add" and "Start" to trigger the measurement. Performed is one single measurement. The signal "Marker 1" indicates the active part of the first frame block. The measured result confirms the expected level of -30 dBm ("Frame Block#1 >...
  • Page 667 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels This example is based on the predefined marker signals. The goal is to capture and measure the short active frame parts to explain the measurement in principle. In your particular case, you typically measure some exact signal parts or even frame parts and you have to define one or more customized marker signals.
  • Page 668 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels a) Select "Marker > Marker 2 > On/Off Ratio", "On Time = 16 MSamples", "Off Time = 16 MSamples". The signal "Marker 2" determines the repetition window; the selected "On Time"...
  • Page 669 ® Monitoring signal characteristics R&S SMW200A Querying information on the baseband power levels 5. In the taskbar, select "System Config > Setup > Baseband Powers", enable the set- tings shown on the following figure, and select "Start" to trigger the measurement. The single measurement is started and lasts a given measurement time.

  • Page 670: Multi-Instrument Setups

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase coherent signals 10 Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A is rarely used as a standalone instrument. Usually, the instrument is connected to a device under test (DUT) or other measurement equipment. Test setups have different requirements, for example: ●...

  • Page 671: Generating Time-Aligned Baseband Signals

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals 10.3 Generating time-aligned baseband signals In test setups that combine the signal of two or more instruments and/or basebands it is often required that: ● The signal generation starts at a defined moment ●...

  • Page 672: Multi-Instrument Settings

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals Final time alignment can require adding I/Q or trigger delay. However, once synchroni- zation is achieved, the primary-secondary instrument mode ensures troggering repro- ducibility, if the used waveform, sample rate and cabling are not changed. Test setup Regarding the synchronization signal, the instruments can be connected (cascaded) in a daisy chain (see...
  • Page 673 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals Settings: State..........................673 Multi Instrument Trigger....................673 Synchronisation State....................673 Global Connector Settings..................673 Show Connector Baseband Sync In/Out..............674 State Activates the configuration. With "State" = "Off", the instrument works in a standalone mode. Remote command: on page 983 :SCONfiguration:MULTiinstrument:STATe...
  • Page 674 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals With "State" = "On", the synchronization signal is assigned per default as follows: ● "Multi Instrument Trigger" > "Primary" "Connector" = "USER 6": "Direction" = "Output", "Signal" = "Baseband Sync Out" ●...
  • Page 675 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals 4. For DACW revision ≥ 6, follow the instructions: ● "To connect the instruments and route signals (R&S SMW-B9, DACW revision ≥ 6)" on page 677 ● "To configure the primary and secondary instruments R&S SMW200A (R&S SMW-B9, DACW revision ≥...
  • Page 676 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals 2. To distribute the internal reference signal of one of the instruments (in this example the primary instrument), connect the instruments in a daisy chain concerning the reference frequency. Connect REF OUT of the primary instrument R&S SMW200A to the REF IN of the first of the secondary instrument group, etc.
  • Page 677 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals c) Observe the automatic trigger source selection "Source" = "Baseband Sync In" Once the baseband is activated, the secondary instruments are triggered by the synchronization signal. If the secondary instrument is R&S SMW200A, the trigger parameters of all base- bands are coupled and all basebands use a common trigger signal.
  • Page 678 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals The trigger parameters of all basebands are coupled. Once the basebands are activated, they use common trigger signal. See also "Starting the signal generation with the first sample" on page 250. 5.

  • Page 679: Triggering Several Instruments With A Common Trigger Signal

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating time-aligned baseband signals 10.3.1.3 Further information See: ● Trigger settings of the used baseband source, for example Chapter 5.5.2.1, "Trig- settings", on page 262. See also Chapter 12.2, "Configuring local and global connectors", on page 745. 10.3.2 Triggering several instruments with a common trigger signal The configuration described in this section is useful, in the following cases: ●...

  • Page 680: Generating Phase-Coherent Signals

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals = T-connector = Trigger source (R&S SMW200A#1) 2, 3 = N number of instruments (R&S SMW200A#2 to R&S SMW200A#n) USER x = Connectors <- = Executes trigger manually Required configurations: ● In all R&S SMW200A: –...

  • Page 681: Required Options

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals chapter or use the possibility of option R&S SMW-K544 to compensate for all effects. However, calibrating the phase difference, time delay difference and amplitude differ- ence between the channels at the RF carrier is a troublesome and time-consuming task.
  • Page 682 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals 10.4.2.1 General settings Figure 10-3: Multi Instrument > RF Ports Alignment State..........................682 Setup...........................683 Info..........................683 Test Setup........................683 Align..........................684 Status.......................... 685 Error History........................ 685 State Activates the RF ports alignment function. Setup files with correction data are transfer- red to the secondary instruments.
  • Page 683 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals ● "System Configuration > Multi Instrument > RF Ports Alignment > RF Ports Setup Info": – "Calibration > LO Coupling = Active" – "Setup Overview > REF Configuration > Signal Source" = "Primary" or "Exter- nal"...
  • Page 684 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Primary instrument The primary instrument, incl. alias name, serial number and number of RF outputs. The primary instrument is the uppermost instrument displayed in dark blue color. Click the block to open a dialog with its "Hostname / IP Address"...
  • Page 685 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Status Retrieves and displays information on the internal compensation status and the con- nected secondary instruments. "No Setup" A setup file has not been loaded. "Invalid Setup" Possible causes: ● The loaded setup file has been removed. ●...
  • Page 686 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals ● Calibration settings....................686 ● Current corrections settings.................. 689 ● Setup overview......................691 Calibration settings Access: ► Select "RF Ports Alignment > Info" > "Calibration". Figure 10-6: RF Ports Setup Info > Calibration This dialog displays summary information on the calibration data as retrieved from the setup file.
  • Page 687 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Calibrated Parameters Summary information on the major calibrated parameters. Remote command: :SCONfiguration:RFALignment:SETup:INFO:CALibration:PARameters? on page 1010 Time since Last Calibration Indicates the elapsed time since the moment the calibration described in the loaded setup file is performed.
  • Page 688 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Remote command: :SCONfiguration:RFALignment:SETup:INFO:CALibration:FREQuency: on page 1012 RANGe:LOWer? :SCONfiguration:RFALignment:SETup:INFO:CALibration:FREQuency: on page 1012 RANGe:UPPer? :SCONfiguration:RFALignment:SETup:INFO:CALibration:POWer:RANGe: on page 1012 LOWer? :SCONfiguration:RFALignment:SETup:INFO:CALibration:POWer:RANGe: on page 1012 UPPer? Frequency Step/PEP Step ← Frequency/PEP Control This value is displayed if "Mode = Range" is used during the calibration. It indicates the frequency/PEP step size that is used to define the frequency and level values to be calibrated with the range, defined with the min and max values.
  • Page 689 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Current corrections settings Access: ► Select "RF Ports Alignment > Info" > "Current Corrections". Figure 10-7: RF Ports Setup Info > Current Corrections This dialog displays summary information on the current correction values per RF path.
  • Page 690 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Remote command: on page 1289 :SOURce<hw>:RFALignment:CALibrated:POWer:PEP? Baseband Frequency Offset Indicates the applied baseband frequency offset f , calculated as the difference BB Offset between the current frequency f ("Status bar > Freq") and the calibrated frequency RF Out ("Calibrated Frequency").
  • Page 691 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Setup overview Access: ► Select "RF Ports Alignment > Info" > "Setup Overview". Figure 10-8: RF Ports Setup Info > Setup Overview This dialog displays the wiring diagram of the setup. The displayed information resembles the setup displayed in the "RF Ports Alignment"...
  • Page 692 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals "Intern (Primary Instrument)" The instrument uses its own LO frequency. In a two-path instruments, the LOs of the two signal paths are cou- pled, where the LO signal of the first path is fed to the LO of the sec- ond one.
  • Page 693 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Secondary instrument(s) The secondary instruments, incl. their remote connection status, alias name, serial number and number of RF outputs. Click the block to open a dialog with information on the "Hostname / IP Address", "Remote Status"...
  • Page 694 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Figure 10-11: RF Ports Setup File Editor The dialog displays an overview information on the following: ● Configured ports including user-defined port names ● The physical instruments on that the ports are located ●...
  • Page 695 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals Remote Status ← RF port table Indicates the remote connection status. The RF port belongs to a secondary instrument; the remote connec- tion to the secondary instrument can be established. The remote connection is active during the time the correction files are transferred to the secondary instruments.
  • Page 696 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Generating phase-coherent signals 3. Select "RF Ports / Instruments > RF ports table" > "Additional S-Parameter Files". In this dialog, you can load S-parameter files to compensate for exchanged cables or other components. Settings: Add S-Parameter File....................696 S-Parameter Filename....................

  • Page 697: Control And Operation Of External Instruments

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Control and operation of external instruments 10.5 Control and operation of external instruments In test scenarios that require more than two RF signals, the I/Q analog and digital out- put signal can be routed to and processed by external instruments. Typically, the gen- erated I/Q streams are further processed by R&S SGT or R&S SGS.

  • Page 698: Control Of Connected R&S Sgt

    ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Control and operation of external instruments 10.5.3 Control of connected R&S SGT Up to 6 R&S SGT instruments can be connected to the R&S SMW200A. As with all external instruments, you find R&S SGT-related information like the connection status and the used RF level and frequency values in the External RF and I/Q dialog.
  • Page 699 ® Multi-instrument setups R&S SMW200A Control and operation of external instruments ● Chapter 4.4.2, "I/Q stream mapper settings", on page 135 For information on the manual and remote control operation of the external instru- ments, see the documentation of the particular instrument: ●...

  • Page 700: File And Data Management

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A About the file system 11 File and data management The R&S SMW200A uses files to save all instrument data. The instrument allows you to save and to load instrument settings, and to import and to export user data for pro- cessing in another instrument or later.
  • Page 701 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A About the file system Types of user data The following data types contain user data: ● Settings or configuration files, for example, you save the current instrument set- tings and load these settings on another instrument. Chapter 11.4, "Saving and recalling settings", on page 709.
  • Page 702 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A About the file system File handling To access files and the file system of the instrument or to use the general file manage- ment functions such as copying and moving data, use the standard "File Manager" dia- log.

  • Page 703: Restoring An Instrument Configuration

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Restoring an instrument configuration Chapter C, "Available user files and file extensions", on page 1409 for an overview of the supported file extensions. File contents To maintain the file size and to accelerate processing times, the instrument saves set- tings that deviate from their default values.
  • Page 704 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Restoring an instrument configuration ● [PRESET] It is the most frequent function. A preset executes a defined instrument setup to provide an initial instrument state as a basis for a new configuration. It resets all parameters and switching states including the states of inactive operat- ing modes.

  • Page 705: Preset, Set To Default And Factory Preset Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Restoring an instrument configuration Presetting the instrument to a user-defined state The reset functions set the parameters and operating modes to default values prede- fined by the factory. Alternatively to these default settings, you can: Alternatively to recalling the instrument default settings, you can preset the instrument to a user-defined state as follows: ●...

  • Page 706: Identifying Parameters With Non-Default Values

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Restoring an instrument configuration Set To Default Resets the associated settings of the corresponding dialog or tab. Remote command: For example, [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:<Digital Standard>:PRESet Preset this Parameter Restores the default value of a single parameter. Execute Factory Preset Resets the instrument to its factory settings.

  • Page 707: Presetting The Instrument To A User-Defined State

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Restoring an instrument configuration Example: Figure 11-2: Marked parameters show that the value deviates from its default Frequency = changed (default = 1 GHz) Offset = changed (default = 0 kHz) Multiplier = unchanged Variation active = changed (default = disabled) Variation step = unchanged...

  • Page 708: Protecting Data

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Protecting data Table 11-1: Key parameters affected by preset and factory preset Parameter Preset value Preset Factory Preset RF frequency 1 GHz RF level (RF output) Offsets Modulation state LF output state Sweep state List mode state Reference frequency settings Network settings...

  • Page 709: Saving And Recalling Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Saving and recalling settings – "Volatile Mode" on page 800 – Chapter 11.9.4, "Using a USB storage device for file transfer", on page 731 ● Save user files temporarily in the /var/volatile directory, which remains available only until the instrument is turned off.

  • Page 710: Save/Recall Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Saving and recalling settings settings, it is possible to retain the current settings or to overwrite them with the saved values. Save/Recall the settings belonging to a firmware option Each of the firmware option provides a special "Save/Recall" function to manage directly the settings associated to the corresponding digital standard, e.g.
  • Page 711 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Saving and recalling settings Settings: Operation Mode......................711 Directory, File List and Filename................. 711 Recent files......................... 712 Show SCPI List......................712 SCPI List........................712 Save..........................712 Save Immediate x....................... 712 Exclude Frequency..................... 712 Exclude Level......................713 Recall..........................
  • Page 712 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Saving and recalling settings ● To perform standard file management functions, like create directories, move, copy, delete files and/or directories, use the standard "File Manager" function (see Chap- ter 11.8, "Using the file manager", on page 720).

  • Page 713: Saving And Recalling Instrument Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Saving and recalling settings Exclude Level The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded. Remote command: on page 1282 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL Recall Restores the selected configuration. During recall, the instrument considers all related settings, for example sweeps in active state or lists.

  • Page 714: Recalling Firmware Option Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Saving and recalling settings 5. Select "Recall Immediate 1" The instrument is restored to the previous state. 6. Select "Recall Immediate 2" to switch to the settings saved in the second file. To save complete instrument settings 1.

  • Page 715: Accessing Files With User Data

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Accessing files with user data 3. Connect both instrument to a LAN. Alternatively, use a USB flash drive to transfer the created *.3g file to the second instrument. 4. In the second instrument, select "Baseband > 3GPP FDD > General > Recall" to load the saved file.
  • Page 716 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Accessing files with user data Tip: The name of the dialog is context-sensitive and differs depending on the par- ticular function this dialog is from. However, the provided functions are similar. 2. To load an existing file: Navigate through the file system.
  • Page 717 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Accessing files with user data 5. Edit the file content. Confirm with "Save". Settings: Directory, File List and Filename................. 717 Functions for handling of data lists................718 Functions for handling of control lists................718 Recent files.........................

  • Page 718: Creating Data Lists And Control Lists

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Accessing files with user data Refer to the description of firmware options for the syntax of the corresponding SCPI command: [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:<Digital Standard>:SETTing:CATalog on page 1198 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? To list files with user data: on page 1095 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:DLISt:CATalog? on page 1095 [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:DM:CLISt:CATalog?

  • Page 719: Exporting And Importing Remote Command Lists

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Loading, importing and exporting lists and access files with user data like data lists and control lists is provided in the follow- ing sections: ● Chapter 5.6.4.2, "How to create and assign a data list", on page 302 Overview of the possible ways and detailed description on how to create data lists.

  • Page 720: Using The File Manager

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Using the file manager Waveform files are created with the signal generation software R&S WinIQSIM2 or in the dialogs of some of the digital standards. For more information, see the following sections: ● Chapter 11.5.2, "Creating data lists and control lists", on page 718...

  • Page 721: File Manager Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Using the file manager Tip: Each "Save/Recall" dialog and each "File Select" dialog provides a quick access to the "File Manger". The "File Manager" dialog provides all standard functions required for file manage- ment.

  • Page 722: Map Network Share Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Using the file manager Chapter C, "Available user files and file extensions", on page 1409 for an overview of the supported file extensions. Directory and Filename Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located. The dialog lists all files in this directory.
  • Page 723 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Using the file manager See also Chapter 11.8.4, "Mapping a network folder", on page 724. Settings: Network Folder......................723 Local Folder........................ 723 User Name........................723 Password........................723 Reconnect at Startup....................723 Connect........................724 Change........................724 Disconnect........................724 Network Folder Enter the path of the folder or computer, e.g.

  • Page 724: Displaying All Saved Files

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Using the file manager Connect Triggers the instrument to prove the credential and to map (i.e. connect) the selected network folder or computer to the instrument. You can map up to 10 network folders. Change Applies the changes.
  • Page 725 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Using the file manager 3. Select "System Config" > "Setup" > "Remote Access" > "Network" to configurw the following network settings: a) Select "Address Mode" > "Auto (DHCP)". b) Check that the "DNS Suffix" and "DNS Server" are correct. 4.

  • Page 726: Transferring Files From And To The Instrument

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Transferring files from and to the instrument If the connection does not succeed, consider to check the following: ● Is the network folder or computer you try to map turned on? ● Is the network folder or computer enabled for remote access? ●...

  • Page 727: Removing File System Protection

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Transferring files from and to the instrument This section provides an introduction to the topic. For comprehensive information, refer to the application note 1GP72: Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators. ● Removing file system protection................

  • Page 728: Accessing The File System Using Ftp

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Transferring files from and to the instrument 4. Enable the "SMB 1.0/2.0 Client". 5. Enable the "SMB 1.0/2.0 Server". 6. Enter the "Security Password". The default password is 123456. For more information, see Chapter 12.7, "Using the security settings",...

  • Page 729: Accessing The R&S Smw200A File System Using Smb (Samba)

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Transferring files from and to the instrument Chapter 12.7.4, "Password management", on page 807. 5. Enter the password to access the user directory. The user directory corresponds to the /var/user/ directory of the instrument. There, you can perform standard functions like creating directory, or saving files.
  • Page 730 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Transferring files from and to the instrument 3. On the remote PC, start the Windows Explorer. 4. In the address field, enter //<"IP Address" of the Instrument>, e.g. ftp:// 10.124.0.166. Tip: The R&S SMW200A indicates its IP address on the block diagram. The user directory corresponds to the /var/user/ directory of the instrument;...

  • Page 731: Using A Usb Storage Device For File Transfer

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Transferring files from and to the instrument You can access the files in the /var/user/ directory, perform standard function like creating directory, or saving files. 11.9.4 Using a USB storage device for file transfer Alternatively to the file transfer possibility via LAN, you can use a USB storage device for direct file transfer from and to the instrument.

  • Page 732: Creating Screenshots Of Current Settings

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings To access the file server 1. On each R&S SMW200A, map the required directory of the file server to the instru- ment. Perform the steps described in Chapter 11.8.4, "Mapping a network folder", on page 724.
  • Page 733 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.14, "HCOPy subsystem", on page 948. Settings: Automatic Naming.......................733 File..........................734 Format.........................734 Options........................734 Save..........................734 Hardcopy Options >...
  • Page 734 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings Remote command: on page 951 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe File... In "Automatic Naming > Off" mode, accesses the standard file select dialog for select- ing the filename and folder the hardcopy is stored in. If you have enabled "Automatic Naming", the instrument displays the automatically generated filename.
  • Page 735 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings Remote command: on page 949 :HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat on page 949 :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage Region ← Hardcopy Options > Common Displays the snapshot area. Remote command: on page 949 :HCOPy:REGion Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming Access: select "Hardcopy >...

  • Page 736: Creating A Hardcopy Of The Display

    ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings <Path>/<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>, where Y, M and D mean year, month, Day; Number is the Current Auto Number. You can activate or deactivate each component separately. The "Resulting filename" indicates the current filename syntax. Remote command: on page 952 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix...
  • Page 737 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings 2. To define the output format, select "Format" > "JPG". 3. To enable the instrument to create output filenames, select "Automatic Naming" > "On". 4. Select "Options ...". 5.
  • Page 738 ® File and data management R&S SMW200A Creating screenshots of current settings c) On the remote computer, navigate through the file system. d) Print the selected file. For more information, refer to the online help of the operating system of the remote computer.

  • Page 739: General Instrument Functions

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Customizing the user interface 12 General instrument functions The general instrument functions include basic instrument settings, regardless of the selected operating mode and measurement. Some of these settings like screen display and peripherals are initially configured at the setup of the instrument, according to per- sonal preferences and requirements.

  • Page 740: Display And Keyboard Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Customizing the user interface Start / stop display update The operating system of the R&S SMW200A refreshes the displayed settings by default in almost real-time, to keep the display updated with the internally used values. However, you can turn off this function to reduce settling times when the instrument is remote controlled.
  • Page 741 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Customizing the user interface In the "Display/Keyboard" dialog, you can enable the screen saver function, config- ure the language for the key assignment of an external keyboard and select the front panel keypad layout. The remote commands required to configure the display and keyboard are described in Chapter 14.12, "DISPlay subsystem",...

  • Page 742: Appearance Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Customizing the user interface Remote command: on page 953 :KBOard:LAYout Alphanumeric Keys Selects the layout of the numeric keypad on the front panel. "Digits Only" Assigns only numeric keys. "Digits and Let- Enables numeric and alphanumeric keys. ters"...

  • Page 743: Defining The Rf Signal State On Power On

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Customizing the user interface The remote command to switch off the display update is described in Chapter 14.12, "DISPlay subsystem", on page 942. Display Update is Disables the automatic refreshing of the displayed values. Remote command: on page 944 :DISPlay:UPDate[:STATe]...

  • Page 744: How To Set The Initial Instrument Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Customizing the user interface Note: The setting is not affected by an instrument preset ([PRESET] key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset. Remote command: on page 1274 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe 12.1.5 How to set the initial instrument settings This section describes how to set up the R&S SMW200A initially.

  • Page 745: Configuring Local And Global Connectors

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 3. Activate the "Screen Saver". 4. Define the "Wait Time" in minutes. The instrument turns off the display after the defined period of time. 5. To reactivate the display, tap the screen or press any key on the front panel. To deactivate the screen saver 1.

  • Page 746: Required Options

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors ● Chapter 12.2.4, "RF connectors settings", on page 754 ● Required options....................746 ● About local and global connectors................ 746 ● Trigger marker clock settings................751 ● RF connectors settings..................754 ●...
  • Page 747 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors Table 12-1 gives an overview of the signals that can be applied to and output at the USER connector. Table 12-1: Mapping control signals to the USER x connectors Connector Direction Assigned Signal...
  • Page 748 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 12.2.2.2 Baseband local connectors Apart from the multipurpose global USER connectors, each baseband coder board is equipped with local T/M/C connectors. Table 12-4 gives an overview of the signals that can be applied and output at the T/M/C connectors.

  • Page 749: Status Indicators

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors Connector Connector Direction Assigned Signal shared between shared between "Baseband A/C" "Baseband B/D" T/M 2, 3 T/M 5, 6 Input "Trigger" T/M 3 T/M 6 Input "Feedback" T/M/(C) 1, 2, 3 T/M/(C) 4, 5, 6 Output "Baseband <BB>...
  • Page 750 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors For a quick overview of the control signal sources, the block diagram provides the "TMC" block on the left side of the "Baseband" block. If the baseband generator is enabled, a dedicated LED indicates the status of the con- trol signal: ●...

  • Page 751: Trigger Marker Clock Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors Figure 12-1: Internal resources for the marker and trigger signals * = Pulse In/Out A/B, Sync A/B, Signal Valid A/B ** = Lev Att, Burst Gate, CW/Mod, Hop, Triggered The baseband couple A/C is implemented on the same hardware, CODER board, and hence share the T/M/C1/2/3 connectors.
  • Page 752 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 2. Use the built-in Show Connector function to display the physical location of the selected connector. A blinking LED on the front/rear panel indicates the selected connector, too. The eye icon in the tab header indicates the panel (front, rear or both) the selected connector is at.
  • Page 753 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 12.2.3.1 Overview table Common to All Basebands To enable simultaneous signal generation in all basebands, the R&S SMW200A cou- ples the trigger settings in the available basebands in any instrument's configuration involving signal routing with signal addition.

  • Page 754: Rf Connectors Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 12.2.4 RF connectors settings Access: 1. In the control signal block next to the "RF" block, select TELPV block. The "RF Connectors" dialog gives an overview of the mapping of the logical signals to the connectors;...

  • Page 755: Global Connectors Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors The eye icon in the tab header indicates, if the connector is on the front panel or rear panel. A blinking blue rectangle marks the connector or multiple connectors, if supported.
  • Page 756 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 3. To access global connector settings via the baseband block of the block diagram, select one of the following: ● Select "Baseband" > "ARB"/"Custom Digital Modulation" > "Trigger In" > "Global Connectors".
  • Page 757 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors Settings: Show Connector......................757 Direction........................757 Signal.......................... 757 Execute Trigger......................759 Threshold USER1-3 Input................... 759 Threshold USER4-6 Input/Threshold Pulse Input............759 Impedance Clock/Trigger Input................... 760 Clock Input Slope......................760 Trigger Input Slope......................760 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the...
  • Page 758 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors "Feedback" Input for global feedback signal, required for 3GPP HSUPA HARQ Feedback, 3GPP Dynamic Power Control or EUTRA/LTE Closed Loop BS tests. "Pulse In A/B" Input of external pulse signal or input of external trigger/gate signal for internal pulse generator (see Chapter 8.11.4.3, "Pulse generator settings",...
  • Page 759 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors "Manual Trigger" Output of a short pulse signal that can serve as a common external trigger signal for triggering of several R&S SMW200A. Example"Triggering several R&S SMW200A instruments simulta- neously"...

  • Page 760: Local Connectors Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors Impedance Clock/Trigger Input Selects the input impedance for the external trigger/clock inputs. Set the value to 1 kΩ/GND for high clock rates. Remote command: on page 1023 [:SOURce]:INPut:USER:TRIGger:IMPedance on page 1023 [:SOURce]:INPut:USER:CLOCk:IMPedance Clock Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied clock signal.
  • Page 761 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors 2. Select "Show Connector" to display the physical location of the selected connector. If active, the LED next to connector is green or yellow. See also "Connector status LEDs" on page 749.
  • Page 762 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors "Baseband <BB> Marker 1/2/3" A broad selection of suitable marker signals is offered in the "Marker" tab of the corresponding digital standard. "Symbol Clock <BB>" Output of the internal clock signal used for digital modulations. The signal is generated automatically when the standard is switched on.

  • Page 763: Routing Signals To The Connectors

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Configuring local and global connectors Impedance Clock/Trigger Input Selects the input impedance for the external trigger/clock inputs. Remote command: on page 1024 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:TM:CLOCk:IMPedance on page 1024 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:TM:TRIGger:IMPedance Clock Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied clock signal. When using custom digital modulation with external serial data, a higher bit modulation requires a reference symbol clock signal.

  • Page 764: Checking Parameters And Dependencies

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Checking parameters and dependencies To map the signal to a connector To map the signal to the connector, proceed as follows: 1. Check the current connector configuration. 2. If necessary, change the signal direction and the signal type. 3.
  • Page 765 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Checking parameters and dependencies The "Parameter & Dependencies" dialog opens. The "Parameter" panel of this dia- log displays the SCPI command including its setting or query parameters. The "Dependencies" panel displays dependent parameters and their settings that affect the setting of the parameter, that you want to check initially (2).

  • Page 766: Organizing Frequently Used Settings As Favorites

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites Settings: Info Accesses the help of the selected parameter, see Chapter 12.3, "Checking parameters dependencies", on page 764. Back/Foward Toggles between parameter dependencies for dependent parameters. If you select "Show Incoming Dependencies" for parameters or settings from the "Dependencies"...

  • Page 767: User Menu Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites ● Your task involves loading and executing of SCPI scripts. Chapter 13.13.4, "How to record / create SCPI lists", on page 884 for infor- mation on how to create a SCPI script. ●...

  • Page 768: How To Use The User Menu For Fast Adjustments

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites 12.4.2 How to use the user menu for fast adjustments Access: 1. Press the [USER] key. The "User Menu" dialog opens. If you execute this action for the first time, the dialog displays instructions on how to use the "User Menu".
  • Page 769 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites The "User Menu" button in the taskbar confirms that you have created a "User Menu" with at least one entry. 4. Press the [USER] key. The "User Menu" dialog shows all parameters that you have added to the list. You can modify the parameter settings directly in this dialog, e.g .change a state or set values, as you do in the particular dialog the parameter originally belongs to.

  • Page 770: Define User Key Actions Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites 3. To tansfer a file from or to an instrument, the R&S SMW200A provides several options, see "File handling" on page 702. 12.4.3 Define user key actions settings Access: ►...

  • Page 771: How To Assign Actions To The [User] Key

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites "Open Dialog, with Position and Size/append to SCPI" Selcts an open settings dialog or menu. Use the "Open Dialog, append to SCPI" function to define a sequence of several dialogs to be opened simultaneously or one after the other.
  • Page 772 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Organizing frequently used settings as favorites To assign a frequently used dialog to the [USER] key: 1. Open the dialog you want to quickly access. For example, select "Baseband > EUTRA/LTE > DL Frame Configuration > Time Plan >...

  • Page 773: Managing Licenses And License Keys

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys The R&S SMW200A executes the action and opens the dialog. 12.5 Managing licenses and license keys The R&S SMW200A provides options for all required applications, as, e.g., for digital standards, you can purchase and activate.
  • Page 774 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Currently, the R&S SMW-T0 trial license includes the options: ● R&S SMW-K17, Wideband differential analog I/Q outputs, see Chapter 4.8, "I/Q analog output settings", on page 186. ● R&S SMW-K22, Pulse modulator, R&S SMW-K23, High performance pulse gener- ator, R&S SMW-K24, Multifunction generator and R&S SMW-K720, AM/FM/PhiM, Chapter 8.11, "Analog modulations",...

  • Page 775: Manage License Keys Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Occupied Licenses A license server allows you to use one or more options with floating license for a speci- fied period of time. Provided the R&S SMW200A is connected one or more license servers, it shows the currently unoccupied, i.e.
  • Page 776 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys In this tab, you can activate licenses for newly purchased or newly registered options. 2. Select "Installed License Keys". This tab lists all active options, with information on the available number of an option, the license type and registration.
  • Page 777 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys This tab lists all installed and activated time-limited licenses with information on the expiration date. 6. Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Occupy Licenses".
  • Page 778 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Settings Device ID........................778 Enter License Key....................... 778 Import License Key from File..................778 Export Deactivation Response to File................. 778 License Installation Info....................779 Installed License Keys....................779 └ Show Inactive....................779 └...
  • Page 779 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys License Installation Info Indicates status information on the performed actions. Installed License Keys Access: select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Installed License Keys". Comprises information on the installed options.
  • Page 780 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys With a waveform packages license, the R&S SMW200A can play a waveform file gen- erated with the R&S WinIQSIM2 software, even if it is not equipped with the corre- sponding digital standard option for using R&S WinIQSIM2 (R&S SMW-K2xy/K4xy).
  • Page 781 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Trial License Table ← Trial License Shows information on the options included in the trial license. "Option" Displays the short designation of an option. Tip: Open the Hardware Options/Software Options dialog to retrieve more information about the installed options.

  • Page 782: Using The License Server

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys "Occupied: <no>" Number of options occupied by the instrument. "Free: <no>" Remaining number of options that can be occupied on the instrument. Select Free Licenses ← Occupy Licenses Sets the number of licenses to occupy. Occupation Period ←...
  • Page 783 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys When you need a specific application, you can obtain a license from the server. When you no longer need the license, return it to the server. The license server releases a returned floating license for use in another instrument only after a follow-up time of 10 minutes.
  • Page 784 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys The license server opens in a browser window and starts initially in the "Configura- tion" view for configuring floating license servers. It lists already configured floating license servers, with information on the host address, designation and state. You can add or remove a floating license server configuration and customize the infor- mation to be displayed.
  • Page 785 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Figure 12-3: Configuration menu Accesses the configured license servers, access lists and installed product defini- tions. a) Select "Local license server". Figure 12-4: Example of a local license server view Shows the onboard license server of the instrument.
  • Page 786 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys b) Select "Floating license server". Figure 12-5: Example of a floating license server view To add the connection to a floating license server, see "To add a remote con- nection to an external license server"...
  • Page 787 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Provides access to the available license servers. Figure 12-8: Example of a license keys view The "License keys" view lists the license key options that are available on the selected server.
  • Page 788 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys Figure 12-10: Example of the license providers view Shows information on configured client applications, license providers and license types. To show additional information, use the column selection. To manage licenses on the R&S SMW200A To request or return a license, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 789 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys b) In the task bar, select "Details". Figure 12-11: Example of the license characteristics of an option 6. To enable a discontinued license: , select in the taskbar. a) Select the license you want to activate. b) In the task bar, select 7.
  • Page 790 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys The onboard license server browser opens. 2. Select "Configuration" > "Local license server". 3. In the task bar, select "Edit". 4. Select the "Access options" tab. 5. Under "Remote Connection Restriction" restrict the access according to your requirements.
  • Page 791 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys To enable remote connection access If the remote connection to the floating license server is blocked, you can release the restriction or configure specific levels to prevent unauthorized access: 1.

  • Page 792: How To Occupy Or Extend A License

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys The "Add" and "Remove" buttons in the task bar are no longer blocked. To add a remote connection to an external license server 1. Open the license server as described in "To open the license server"...
  • Page 793 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys If all licenses are occupied, the license management of the instrument blocks the set- tings under "Occupy Free Licenses". But you can still extend the period of already occupied licenses, the instrument lists under "Renew Occupation Period", see "To extend the occupation period for an option in use"...

  • Page 794: How To Move A Portable License

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys To extend the occupation period for an option in use If an option is already occupied, the R&S SMW200A lists each option under "Renew Occupation Period". 1. Access: Navigate to the "Occupy / Renew License: ..." dialog, as described in "To occupy an option"...
  • Page 795 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing licenses and license keys a) On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assem- bly > Manage License Keys > New License > Device ID". b) On the target instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assem- bly >...

  • Page 796: Managing Extensions

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Managing extensions 12. In the target instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > New License > Import License Keys from File". 13. Select the created license key file. The portable option is installed on the target instrument.

  • Page 797: Using The Security Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings 5. In the "Manage Extensions" dialog, select "Reboot" to restart the R&S SMW200A. After the reboot, the R&S SMW200A provides the loaded extension in the base- band block. To deinstall an extension 1.

  • Page 798: Protection Level Settings

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings Unlocks protected service functions. It is accessible to authorized personnel of Rohde & Schwarz service department only. ● Protection level 3 to 5 Are reserved for internal use. Security The security concept of the R&S SMW200A helps you to protect your instrument against uncontrolled access and changes.

  • Page 799: Setting Security Parameters

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings The "Protection" dialog provides access to the unlocking of different protection lev- els. Several functions in the instrument are password-protected to prevent for example accidental changes, "Protection" on page 797. The remote commands required to unlock a protected stage are described in Chap- ter 14.20, "SYSTem...
  • Page 800 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings In the "General" tab, you can determine the security level for firmware updates, and configure the security settings for the mass memory and manual operation. All modified settings in this dialog are not applied until you enter the Security Password and confirm with Accept.
  • Page 801 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings In volatile mode: ● Data that the instrument normally stores on the internal memory is redirected to volatile memory. ● The user directory is mapped to the volatile memory. You access the temporary data just as data stored in the /var/user/, see Chapter 11.3, "Protecting data",...
  • Page 802 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings The "SW Update" tab enables you to lock front panel operation and/or reading the display. The remote commands available to control security settings are described in: ● Chapter 14.12, "DISPlay subsystem", on page 942 ●...
  • Page 803 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings "Touchscreen Off" Locks the touch sensitivity of the screen. This security feature protects the instrument against unintentional change of settings by accidentally touching of the screen. Still available controls for manual operation are: ●...

  • Page 804: Configuring Lan Services

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation Follow the instructions listed in "Unlocking (reactivating) the user interface for manual operation" on page 814. Remote command: on page 1312 :SYSTem:ULOCk on page 1311 :SYSTem:DLOCk on page 1311...
  • Page 805 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings Contact the Rohde & Schwarz (https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/support) to get the ISO image. ● Ship the instrument to your local service department. The service center experts can enable the remote access over LAN without loosing user-specific settings and data.
  • Page 806 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings "SCPI over LAN" Access over LAN to control the instrument remotely, by using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. See also "To set up the controller with R&S VISA" on page 870 and "To start remote control with R&S VISA"...

  • Page 807: Password Management

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings "Avahi (Zeroconf)" Avahi, a service for automatic configuration of the instrument in a net- work environment. Remote command: on page 1322 :SYSTem:SECurity:NETWork:AVAHi[:STATe] "Software Update" Allows updating the software. Remote command: :SYSTem:SECurity:NETWork:SWUPdate[:STATe] on page 1325 Samba Services...
  • Page 808 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings In this tab, you can assign the security and a user-defined password. 2. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > Security Password". How to: ●...
  • Page 809 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings User Password Access: select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > User Password". Allows you to change and confirm the user password. Old Password ← User Password Enters the current user password.

  • Page 810: Preventing Unauthorized Access

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings New Password ← Security Password Enters the new security password. The security password can contain decimal characters only. Confirm Password ← Security Password Confirms the new security password by repeating. How to: ●...
  • Page 811 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings d) Select "Change Password". The user password is changed; the user name is displayed ("Security > Password Management > User Password > User Name"). To change the security password ► Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network.
  • Page 812 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings To disable LAN services individually 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security". 2. Select "LAN Services > Common Services". 3. Uncheck all services you want to block, for example "FTP > Off" or "VNC > Off". 4.
  • Page 813 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Using the security settings 3. For example, check "SMB 1.0/2.0 Client". 4. Select "SMB 1.0/2.0 Client > On" and "SMB 1.0/2.0 Server > On". 5. Enter the Security Password. 6. Select "Accept". Enables the access for the SMB Samba client, the access for the SMB Samba server remains blocked.

  • Page 814: Undoing Or Restoring Actions

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Undoing or restoring actions Unlocking (reactivating) the user interface for manual operation 1. In manual operation: a) On the instrument's keypad or external keyboard, press any key. The instrument prompts you to enter the security password for unlocking. If you press the character of the first key, the input field accepts the character immediately.

  • Page 815: Shutting Down And Rebooting The Instrument

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Shutting down and rebooting the instrument Access: ► Select "Setup > Settings > Undo/Redo". The dialog contains all functions for enabling the "Undo/Redo" functionality. Settings: State..........................815 History List........................815 Clear History....................... 815 Apply........................... 815 State Enables the recording of the performed actions.

  • Page 816: Reference

    ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Reference Access: ► Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Shut down". Remote control commands: ● on page 1333 :SYSTem:REBoot ● on page 1333 :SYSTem:SHUTdown 12.10 Reference This section provides reference information on where to find the descriptions of all functions accessed via the SETUP key.
  • Page 817 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Reference Menu item Content Described in ... Remote Access GPIB Enables you to set the GPIB Chapter 13.5.3, "GPIB address address of the instrument. settings", on page 840 Network Contains all relevant information Chapter 13.5.1, "Network set- for the remote control of the tings", on page 835...
  • Page 818 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Reference Menu item Content Described in ... Hardcopy Creates a screenshot from the Chapter 11.10, "Creating screen- current screen. shots of current settings", on page 732 Security Security Contains security functions to pro- Chapter 12.7.2, "Setting security tect the instrument against uncon- parameters", on page 799...
  • Page 819 ® General instrument functions R&S SMW200A Reference Menu item Content Described in ... Contents Accesses the embedded help Chapter 3.5.6, "Getting informa- system. tion and help", on page 102 Index Export Help To User Path Copies the online help system to the instrument's user directory/var/user/.

  • Page 820: Network Operation And Remote Control

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A 13 Network operation and remote control As an alternative to the interactive operation directly at the instrument, you can operate the R&S SMW200A also from a remote location. The various interfaces provide flexible access to the instrument, such as remote con- trol, remote operation or remote file access.

  • Page 821: Overview Of Remote Access Modes

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Overview of remote access modes ● To trace messages with the LXI web browser interface........878 ● To return to manual operation................878 ● To automate tasks with remote command scripts..........879 ●...

  • Page 822: Remote Control Interfaces And Protocols

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control interfaces and protocols Table 13-1: Supported VNC operation modes Remote device VNC client Requirements Characteristics ● Desktop Ultr@VNC Ultr@VNC or Client Software Fast, supports several options like ● Other dedicated client soft- must be installed.

  • Page 823: Lan Interface

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control interfaces and protocols Table 13-2: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Remarks Protocols, VISA address string and library ● Local area network HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol The LAN connector is at the rear panel of the (IVI-6.1) (LAN) instrument.
  • Page 824 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control interfaces and protocols There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument: ● A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing network. ● A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru- ment and a single computer.

  • Page 825: Usb Interface

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control interfaces and protocols Example: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::hislip0 VXI-11 TCPIP::<host address>[::inst0][::INSTR] [::inst0] = LAN device name, indicates that the VXI-11 protocol is used (optional) inst0 currently selects the VXI-11 protocol by default and can be omitted. Example: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR Socket communication...

  • Page 826: Gpib Interface (Iec/Ieee Bus Interface)

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control interfaces and protocols USB resource string The resource string represents an addressing scheme that is used to establish a com- munication session with the instrument. It is based on the instrument address and some instrument- and vendor-specific information.

  • Page 827: Lxi Browser Interface

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control programs and libraries GPIB = denotes the used interface <channel address> = the used channel [::INSTR] = indicates the instrument resource class (optional) Note: If the VISA implementation supports the GPIB interface, you can optionally define the VISA Instrument Control Resource (INSTR).
  • Page 828 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control programs and libraries Possible setups and access functions The following examples give an overview of dependencies between the available libra- ries, the possible interfaces and protocols, and whether an instrument driver is provi- ded.
  • Page 829 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote control programs and libraries Example: Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA available) Figure 13-4: Application using instrument driver (VISA available) Protocol Remote control program Socket rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMW200A-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...) rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9) VXI-11 rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMW200A-102030::inst0::INSTR", ...) rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)

  • Page 830: Status Reporting System

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Status reporting system Example: Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA not available) Figure 13-5: Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA not available) Protocol Remote control program Socket rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMW200A-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...) rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9) GPIB rssmw_init ("GPIB::28::INSTR", ...)
  • Page 831 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Status reporting system Figure 13-6: Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy OPER = Operation Status Summary Bit RQS/MSS = Service Request Generation = Standard Event Status Summary Bit = Message Available in Output Queue QUES = Questionable Status Summary Bit = Error- /Event-Queue...

  • Page 832: Instrument-Specific Status Operation Register

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Status reporting system The following sections describe the instrument-specific bit assignments of the opera- tion status and the questionable status registers. For more information, see: ● Remote control via SCPI: provides general information on the status reporting sys- tem of Rohde &...

  • Page 833: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings 13.4.4 Reset values of the status reporting system The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet affect the functional instrument settings.
  • Page 834 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings The selected instrument also defines the identification string that is retrieved with query *IDN?. If necessary, use the parameter Mode IDN String to change this string. As any other parameter, the remote control command set can also be changed remotely by the command :SYSTem:LANGuage.

  • Page 835: Network Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings REST endpoint SNMP MIB Description Typical data /api/hums/v1/... documents developer information SNMP MIB files, swagger specification of HUMS REST endpoints greetings RS-GREETINGS-MIB identity information manufacturer, model, serial number, version equipment/bios RS-BIOS-INFO-MIB BIOS information...
  • Page 836 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings The "Network" dialog provides settings of the general network environment, and specific identification parameters of the instrument in the network. If necessary, you can configure the instrument address settings manually. How to: "To assign the instrument address manually"...
  • Page 837 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Hostname Displays the hostname. Each instrument is delivered with an assigned hostname, a logical name which can be used instead of the IP address. With the default network settings, the IP address is allocated by the DHCP server.
  • Page 838 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. If the DHCP server is available Address Mode A AUTO (DHCP), the setting is read-only. The sub- net mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g.

  • Page 839: Visa Resource Strings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings 13.5.2 VISA resource strings Access: ► Select "System Config > Remote Access > Visa Resource Strings". The "Visa Resource String" dialog displays the VISA resource strings provided for remote control over the different interfaces. The remote commands required to query the address information remotely are descri- bed in Chapter 14.20, "SYSTem...

  • Page 840: Gpib Address Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Socket Displays the visa resource string for remote control over LAN, using the socket com- munication protocol. See also Chapter 13.2.1, "LAN interface", on page 823. Remote command: on page 1319 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource? GPIB Displays the visa resource string for remote control over the GPIB interface.

  • Page 841: Rs232 Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Settings: GPIB Channel Address....................841 GPIB Channel Address Sets the GPIB (IEC/IEEE bus) channel address for the connected instrument. Remote command: on page 1315 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 13.5.4 RS232 settings Access: ►...

  • Page 842: Instrument Emulations Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface. Remote command: on page 1319 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs 13.5.5 Instrument emulations settings Access: ► Select "System Config > Remote Access > Instrument Emulations". The "Instrument Emulations"...

  • Page 843: Remote Connections Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Remote command: on page 1320 :SYSTem:IDENtification Set to Default In "Mode > User Defined", resets the *IDN and *OPT strings. Remote command: on page 1321 :SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet IDN String Indicates the identification string of the instrument when queried with the common command *IDN?.
  • Page 844 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings The "Active" tab shows the currently active remote connections, and you can enable the display of the active connections in the task bar. Settings: Show Remote Connections in Taskbar............... 844 SCPI Connections.......................844 TCP/IP...

  • Page 845: Hums Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings The "Closed" tab shows the currently active remote connections, and you can enable the display of the active connections in the task bar. Settings: SCPI Connections.......................845 TCP/IP Connections....................845 SCPI Connections Lists the VISA resource strings of the last remote connections that have accessed the instrument via the LAN interface before.
  • Page 846 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Access: ► Select "System Config > Remote Access > HUMS". The dialog provides settings to configure the health and utilization monitoring sys- tem (HUMS) of the R&S SMW200A. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.11, "HUMS remote control commands",...

  • Page 847: Hums Enhanced Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Export History Triggers an export of the logged data of the HUMS service into a *.zip file. A standard file dialog opens, to save the log file. By default, the file is saved to the directory /var/user/.
  • Page 848 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Access: 1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > HUMS". 2. Select "State > ON". 3. Select "Enhanced Settings". 4. Select "Protocol". The dialog provides enhanced settings for configuring protocol settings and device tags.
  • Page 849 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Remote command: on page 940 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation Contact ← SNMP Configuration Sets the SNMP contact information. This information complies with the person who manages the SNMP server and is used for identification of the SNMP server. By default, this input field is empty.
  • Page 850 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings 5. Select "User Settings". The "Configure SNMP User for HUMS" dialog provides an overview of all defined SNMP users and their profiles. With the "Add" and "Delete All" controls, you can add or remove users.
  • Page 851 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings The table informs on the user name and its specified user profile. Remote command: on page 941 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL? Edit ← User table Accesses the "Edit SNMP Users for HUMS" dialog, where you can modify an already defined user profile.
  • Page 852 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Prefix ← User table Shows the access right of the selected user. Level ← User table Shows the security level of the selected user. Delete ← User table Removes the selected user from the list. Remote command: on page 941 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete...
  • Page 853 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings SNMP User Level ← Add SNMP User for HUMS Defines the security level of the SNMP user. Depending on the security level, the ser- vice requests user name and passphrases for authentication and encryption. "No Authentication &...
  • Page 854 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Configures device tags for tagging user-defined information of the instrument in a table. You can define up to 32 device tags, e.g., for HUMS history evaluation. To add a device tag, define "Key" and "Value" of the device tag in the table. Click "Add"...

  • Page 855: Qr Code

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A Remote access settings Delete Deletes the selected device tag from the HUMS history. Remote command: on page 938 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete Adds a new device tag to the HUMS service. Remote command: on page 938 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] on page 937 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL?

  • Page 856: Lxi Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings 13.6 LXI settings On the R&S SMW200A, an LXI functionality is already installed and enabled. Thus, you can access he instrument using any web browser. 13.6.1 LXI status settings On the R&S SMW200A, an LXI functionality is already installed and enabled. Thus, you can access he instrument using any web browser.

  • Page 857: Lxi Browser Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings LAN Reset Initiates the network configuration reset mechanism for the instrument and resets the hostname, MAC address, and IP address. According to the LXI standard, a LAN reset must set the following network parameters to a default state: Parameter Value...
  • Page 858 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings The instrument homepage (welcome page) opens. The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements: ● "LXI" – "Home" opens the instrument homepage. The homepage displays the device information required by the LXI stan- dard, including the VISA resource string in read-only format.
  • Page 859 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings 13.6.2.1 LAN configuration The "LAN Configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification. It comprises the following navigation entries. ● configuration..................... 859 ● Advanced config....................860 ● Ping client......................861 IP configuration...
  • Page 860 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings Advanced config The "Advanced Config" web page provides LAN settings that are not declared manda- tory by the LXI standard. The following advanced parameters are available: ● "mDNS and DNS-SD": The additional protocols "multicast DNS" and "DNS service discovery"...
  • Page 861 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings Ping client The "Ping Client" page provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the LXI-compliant instrument and another device. The ping is initiated from the instrument. Using the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets, this function checks whether the communication with a device via LAN is working.
  • Page 862 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings Toolbars The toolbar at the top of the dialog provides basic settings and functions. ● "Live mode" / "logging": If logging is switched on, messages are traced. They are stored in an internal database and can be displayed upon request, using the refresh button (live mode off) or they can be displayed automatically (live mode on).
  • Page 863 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A LXI settings ● "message": indicates the type of the message. Possible values and related mes- sage contents are: – > = incoming command – < = outgoing response to a query – E = error message, denoted in red –...

  • Page 864: To Configure The Instrument For Remote Access

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To configure the instrument for remote access For more information, refer to the specifications document. 13.7 To configure the instrument for remote access The R&S SMW200A is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN (local area network).

  • Page 865: To Configure The Access Over Lan

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To configure the instrument for remote access 13.7.2 To configure the access over LAN About network address information Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru- ment can be obtained in different ways. ●...
  • Page 866 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To configure the instrument for remote access 5. Enter the IP address, for example 192.168.0.1. The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block con- tains 3 numbers in maximum. 6.
  • Page 867 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To configure the instrument for remote access Example: The default hostname of an R&S SMW200A with a serial number 102030 is SMW200A-102030. To query and change the hostname 1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > Network". Section "Instrument Name"...
  • Page 868 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To configure the instrument for remote access 2. Select "Security". 3. Select "LAN Services". 4. Enable "LAN" state. 5. In the "Common Services" side tab, uncheck all services you want to block. 6.

  • Page 869: To Configure The Access Over Gpib

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN 13.7.3 To configure the access over GPIB To control the instrument remotely over the GPIB bus, it must be addressed using the GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 28, but it can be changed if it does not fit in the network environment.

  • Page 870: To Establish The Connection With The Lxi Web Browser

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN 13.8.1 To establish the connection with the LXI web browser Using the LXI browser interface you can access and control the R&S SMW200A instru- ment remotely from another PC without additional installation.
  • Page 871 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN 3. On the controller, start, e.g., "R&S VISA > Tester". 4. In the menu bar, select "Choose VISA Implementation > Rohde & Schwarz Visa" 5.
  • Page 872 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN 10. Confirm with "Ok". The "Find and select resource" dialog closes and R&S VISA indicates the IP address in the "Resource" field of the main application window. 11.
  • Page 873 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN c) Fill in the "Alias" name, the "VISA Resource String" and the "Device IP Address or hostname" as shown in the figure. R&S VISA indicates the assigned "Alias" name. d) Confirm with "OK".
  • Page 874 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN 3. Confirm with "Query". The instrument switches to remote control when it receives a command from the controller. 4. Select "Read" to obtain the instrument response. The instrument returns the response.

  • Page 875: To Establish The Connection Using Socket Communication

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over LAN R&S VISA saves all log-view entries to a log file. You can operate the log-view in two modes: ● "Live Mode": shows only the most recent messages ●...

  • Page 876: To Establish A Remote Control Session Over Gpib

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over GPIB The connection to the instrument is set up and you can send remote-control com- mands. 4. Telnet does not reflect your first entry. Insert a command, e.g. *IDN and confirm with "Enter". 5.

  • Page 877: To Establish A Remote Control Session Over Usb

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To establish a remote control session over USB 2. Select "System Config > Remote Access > GPIB Address" > "GPIB Channel Address = 28". The GPIB address of the instrument must be the default value of 28. 3.

  • Page 878: To Trace Messages With The Lxi Web Browser Interface

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To return to manual operation 13.11 To trace messages with the LXI web browser interface The remote trace functionality allows you to trace commands and messages exchanged via a remote control interface of the R&S SMW200A. To activate SCPI remote trace The remote trace functionality allows you to trace SCPI commands and messages exchanged over the LAN of the R&S SMW200A.

  • Page 879: To Automate Tasks With Remote Command Scripts

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts To return from "Remote LLO" state to manual or to "Remote" state, perform one of the following: ● On the controller, use the command &LOCS. This command switches directly to manual operation.
  • Page 880 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts Both, automatic and manual SCPI recording of settings is possible. You can start, stop and resume automatic recording, and also record individual commands man- ually. –...

  • Page 881: Show Scpi Command Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts leads you to the description of the SCPI command comprising the complete SCPI syntax, all available setting values, value ranges, etc. "Finding out the SCPI command using the online help" on page 890.

  • Page 882: Displaying A Scpi List

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts Setttings: Copy..........................882 Close........................... 882 Copy Copies the command and the current setting. Close Exits the "SCPI Command" dialog. 13.13.2 Displaying a SCPI list The instrument displays a recorded SCPI list and thus provides monitoring the recor- ded results before exporting.

  • Page 883: Scpi Recording Export Settings

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts Remove First Deletes the first entry in the SCPI command list. Remove Last Deletes the last entry in the SCPI command list. Export Opens the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog for configuring the file parameters for the SPCI command script file.

  • Page 884: How To Record / Create Scpi Lists

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts Export..........................884 Reload.........................884 File content........................884 Format Selects the source code format for the command list. "Plain SCPI" Uses SCPI syntax. "Predefined Code Generator" Accesses the predefined templates for common source code genera- tors that convert the recorded settings in the programming languages MATLAB or NICVI or Python.
  • Page 885 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts The R&S SMW200A now records all steps you take. 3. To stop SCPI recording, select "Stop SCPI recording" in the context-sensitive menu. The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens. 4.
  • Page 886 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts The dialog adjusts the entry fields for configuring the command list file. "Show SCPI List" provides access to the list of all setttings the instrument has recorded. 3.
  • Page 887 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts The R&S SMW200A displays the syntax and the setting value of the SCPI com- mand. With the "Copy" function, you can copy and paste the SCPI command and setting value, e.g., in a command script on a PC.

  • Page 888: How To Convert And Save Scpi Lists

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts b) Complete missing parts of commands. c) Remove superfluous entries, e.g. :SYST:INF:SCPI 'SCPI command not available'. d) Remove unnecessary content written after a preset. 4. Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order. For example, if you set a STATe command to the last position in a list, you can avoid intermediate calculations of the signal.

  • Page 889: How To Find Out The Scpi Commands For Gui Functions

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts 7. Select "File". A standard file handling dialog opens. 8. Configure filename and directory and confirm with "Ok". 9. In the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog, select "Export". The R&S SMW200A saves the recorded data in the corresponding format.
  • Page 890 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts With the "Copy" function, you can conveniently paste the command including the current setting, e.g., in a command script. Finding out the SCPI command using the online help If you are looking for the remote command to a function in manual operation, you find it in the description of the online help.
  • Page 891 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To automate tasks with remote command scripts Finding out a function in manual operation corresponding to a SCPI command If you are searching for the associated function to a remote command in the manual operation (GUI), proceed as follows: 1.

  • Page 892: To Operate The Instrument Using Vnc

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To operate the instrument using VNC 1 = Path for tracing (breadcrumbs navigation) 2 = Description of the function in manual control 3 = Cross-reference to return back to the SCPI command 13.14 To operate the instrument using VNC This section shows you some examples of the various possibilities to set up remote operation.

  • Page 893: Enabling Vnc Service

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To operate the instrument using VNC 13.14.1 Enabling VNC service To enable VNC service on the R&S SMW200A 1. NOTICE! Enabled VNC service can lead to unauthorized access. Change the computer name and password of the instrument. Chapter 12.7.5, "Preventing unauthorized access", on page 810.
  • Page 894 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To operate the instrument using VNC Various free-of charge programs such as Ultr@VNC or similar VNC client programs are available for download on the Internet. To operate the instrument from a Linux/Unix client over VNC 1.

  • Page 895: How To Set Up Remote Operation From A Smart Device

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To operate the instrument using VNC 5. Confirm with "Connect". An authentication dialog opens. 6. Enter the user password for authentication. The default password is instrument. 7. Confirm with "LogOn". When the connection is established, the screen of the signal generator appears and you can operate the instrument from the remote computer.
  • Page 896 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To operate the instrument using VNC Example: Figure 13-8: Example of a network configuration for remote operation with a smart device As shown in the figure, the R&S SMW200A and the WLAN router are connected to the LAN router.
  • Page 897 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A To operate the instrument using VNC If your smart device is equipped with a camera and a QR code reader, you can scan the instrument's IP address or access the instrument with the Safari web browser.

  • Page 898: References

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A References 3. Enter the user password. The default password is instrument. 4. Confirm with with "OK". When the VNC connection is established, the screen of the signal generator appears and you can operate the instrument from the remote computer. 13.14.3.3 Special mode QR code If your smart device is equipped with a camera and a QR code reader, you can scan...

  • Page 899: Code Generator Templates

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A References LXI is intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ethernet with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB. Like GPIB, LXI determines and standardizes the way the instrument behaves in a LAN. The LXI implementation in the R&S SMW200A allows you to change certain LAN set- tings, to reset the LAN connection, and to identify the instrument.
  • Page 900 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A References Command Function #NO_COMMAND_CODE_START Frame for a parameter with no SCPI command available. A parameter is accessed with #NO_COMMAND_CODE_END %PARAMETER. #EXIT_CODE_START Closes the visa session. #EXIT_CODE_END All entries between start and end are written once at the end of the output file.

  • Page 901: Remote Control States

    ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A References //create a VISA session to the serial port and return a handle to it viOpen (defaultRM, (ViRsrc)"TCPIP::localhost::INSTR", VI_NULL, VI_NULL, &handle); #INIT_CODE_END #COMMAND_CODE_START write_command("%COMMAND"); #COMMAND_CODE_END #NO_COMMAND_CODE_START //no SCPI command available for parameter %PARAMETER ! #NO_COMMAND_CODE_END #EXIT_CODE_START viClose (handle);...
  • Page 902 ® Network operation and remote control R&S SMW200A References Table 13-6: Remote control status icons GUI symbol Transition to remote control state... Transition to manual operation...(local state) ● &GTR (controller) &GTL (controller) ● Tap the "Remote" icon (display) Remote control, but usable front panel keys. ●...

  • Page 903: Remote Control Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions 14 Remote control commands In the following, all remote-control commands are presented in detail with their param- eters and the ranges of numerical values. For an introduction to remote control and the status registers, see Chapter 13, "Net- work operation and remote control",...

  • Page 904: Backward Compatibility With Other Rohde & Schwarz Signal Generators

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Backward compatibility with other Rohde & Schwarz signal generators Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values. ● Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con- firmed.

  • Page 905: Scpi Command Aliases For Advanced Mode With Multiple Entities

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCPI command aliases for advanced mode with multiple entities 14.3 SCPI command aliases for advanced mode with multi- ple entities When working in Advanced mode, the R&S SMW200A can generate the signal of sev- eral entities.
  • Page 906 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCPI command aliases for advanced mode with multiple entities Figure 14-2: ENTity<ch>:SOURce<hw> combination *) applies for: – SOUR:BB:FOFF|POFF|PGA – SOUR:BBIN:... – SOUR:BB:..., if separate baseband sources are used LxMxN is the short form of the used system configuration, where: ●...

  • Page 907: Programming Examples

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Common commands ● ENTity2:SOURce1:BBIN:DIG:SOUR and SOURce3:BBIN:DIG:SOUR You can find the corresponding commands also with the "Show SCPI command" func- tions in the context menu of parameters. "Finding out the SCPI command with the "Show SCPI Command" function" on page 889.
  • Page 908 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Common commands ...........................909 *OPT? ..........................909 *PRE ..........................910 *PSC ..........................910 *RCL ..........................910 *RST ..........................910 *SAV ..........................911 *SRE ........................... 911 *STB? ..........................911 *TRG ........................... 911 *TST? ..........................912 *WAI *CLS Clear status Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero.
  • Page 909 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Common commands Example: Rohde&Schwarz,SMW200A, 1412.0000K02/102030,4.00.023 Usage: Query only Manual operation: "IDN String" on page 843 "Hardware Options/Software Options" on page 1360 *IST? Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll.
  • Page 910 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Common commands Parameters: <Value> Range: 0 to 255 *PSC <Action> Power on status clear Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru- ment is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured.
  • Page 911 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Common commands To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file, use the command :MMEMory: STORe:STATe. Manual operation: "Save Immediate x" on page 712 *SRE <Contents> Service request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter- mines under which conditions a service request is triggered.

  • Page 912: Preset Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A Preset commands *WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and *OPC). Usage: Event 14.6 Preset commands The preset commands are not bundled in one subsystem.

  • Page 913: Mmemory Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem :SOURce<hw>:PRESet Supported in 2x1x1 configurations: ● :SCONfiguration:MODESTANdard ● :SCONfiguration:MODEADVanced with :SCONfiguration:FADingFAAFBB Presets all parameters which are related to the selected signal path. Fading simulator (if available) and the transient recorder are only preset by the com- mand *RST.

  • Page 914: File Naming Conventions

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem Mass storage location Without any additional measures, the R&S SMW200A stores user files on the internal memory or if connected, on a memory stick. Both, the user directory /var/user/ on the internal memory or the /usb/ directory on the memory stick, can be used to preserve user-defined data.

  • Page 915: Handling Files In The Default Or In A Specified Directory

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem ter represents all characters up to the end of the filename. "*.*" therefore represents all files in a directory. Filename and file path When used in remote control commands, the parameter <filename> is specified as a string parameter with quotation marks.

  • Page 916: Programming Examples

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem // Set the default directory first MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/user/DigMod" SOURce1:BB:DM:SETTing:CATalog? // "SaveRecallTest","dmSavRcl" // Specify only the file name; the extenssion *.dm is assigned automatically SOURce1:BB:DM:SETTing:STORe "dmSettings" SOURce1:BB:DM:SETTing:DELete "dmSavRcl" SOURce1:BB:DM:SETTing:LOAD "SaveRecallTest" SOURce1:BB:DM:SETTing:CATalog? // "SaveRecallTest","dmSettings" Working with the files of other subsystems or files containing the settings of a particular digital standard (e.g.
  • Page 917 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem Before the instrument settings can be saved in a file, they have to be saved in an inter- mediate memory using common command *SAV <number>. The specified number is then used in the command.

  • Page 918: Remote Control Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem // query only number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? "/var/user" // 5 // query number of files in the current or specified directory MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth? "/var/user" // 7 // Create a new directory for mass memory storage in the specified directory MMEMory:MDIRectory "/var/user/new"...
  • Page 919 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem ..................921 :MMEMory:DATA:UNPRotected ....................923 :MMEMory:DCATalog? ..................923 :MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? ......................923 :MMEMory:DELete ....................923 :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe ....................924 :MMEMory:MDIRectory ......................924 :MMEMory:MOVE ......................924 :MMEMory:MSIS ....................925 :MMEMory:RDIRectory ...................925 :MMEMory:RDIRectory:RECursive ....................925 :MMEMory:STORe:STATe ......................925 :MEMory:HFRee? :MMEMory:CATalog? Returns the content of a particular directory. Return values: <Catalog>...
  • Page 920 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem Parameters: <Directory> <directory_name> String containing the path to another directory. The path can be relative or absolute. To change to a higher directory, use two dots '..' . Example: Example"Working with files and directories" on page 917.
  • Page 921 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem Setting parameters: <Filename> string String parameter to specify the name of the file. Query parameters: <Filename> #<number><length_entry><data> #: Hash sign; always comes first in the binary block <number>: the first digit indicates how many digits the subse- quent length entry has <length_entry>: indicates the number of subsequent bytes <data>: binary block data for the specified length.
  • Page 922 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem I/Q data or marker binary data, where the number of marker ele- ments has to be equal to the number of I/Q samples Binary block data follows the syntax: #<Digits><Length><I0Q0...IxQx...IN-1QN-1> or #<Digits><Length><M0M1...Mx...MN-1> Indicates the start of the data block <Digits>...
  • Page 923 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem :MMEMory:DCATalog? Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory. Return values: <DCatalog> <file_entry> Names of the subdirectories separated by colons. The first two strings are related to the parent directory. Example: Example"Working with files and directories" on page 917.
  • Page 924 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem Setting parameters: <SavRclStateNumb> Determines to the specific <number> to be used with the *RCL command, e.g. *RCL 4. <file_name> String parameter to specify the file name with extension *.savrcltxt. Example: Example"Saving and loading current settings" on page 916.
  • Page 925 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A MMEMory subsystem :MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory> Removes an empty directory from the mass memory storage system. If no directory is specified, the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory. To remove a directory with contents, use command :MMEMory:RDIRectory: on page 925.

  • Page 926: Calibration Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A CALibration subsystem Return values: <TotalPhysMemKb> integer Total physical memory. <ApplicMemKb> integer Application memory. <HeapUsedKb> integer Used heap memory. <HeapAvailableKb> integer Available heap memory. Usage: Query only 14.8 CALibration subsystem The CALibration subsystem contains the commands needed for performing internal adjustments.
  • Page 927 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A CALibration subsystem :CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]? [<Force>] Starts all internal adjustments that do not need external measuring equipment. Note: If an external frequency converter R&S SZU is connected, the internal adjust- ments are blocked, and the R&S SMW200A generates an error message. Query parameters: <Force>...
  • Page 928 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A CALibration subsystem :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP? Queries the temperature deviation compared to the calibration temperature. Return values: <Temperature> string Example: CALibration:ALL:TEMP? // "+12.00 K" Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Temperature Offset" on page 1376 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TIME? Queries the time elapsed since the last full adjustment. Return values: <Time>...
  • Page 929 ® R&S SMW200A Remote control commands CALibration subsystem Return values: <Date> string Example: CAL:DATA:FACT:DATE? // "2016-01-01" Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Last Factory Calibration" on page 1359 :CALibration:DELay:MINutes <Minutes> Sets the warm-up time to wait before internal adjustment starts automatically. Automatic execution starts only, if you have enabled the calibration with command CALibration:DELay[:MEASure]? Parameters:...
  • Page 930 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A CALibration subsystem Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Adjust All Delayed" on page 1378 :CALibration<hw>:DEBug <State> Activates logging of the internal adjustments. Setting parameters: <State> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON *RST: Example: CALibration:DEBug 1 Usage: Setting only Manual operation:...

  • Page 931: Clock Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DIAGnostic subsystem Manual operation: "Adjust External Frequency Converter" on page 1377 :CALibration<hw>:LOSCillator:COUPling:LOCal? Adjusts the internal LO level at the I/Q modulator automatically, when an external LO signal is fed. Return values: <CouplingLevel> 1 | ON | 0 | OFF *RST: Example: CALibration:LOSCillator:COUPling:LOCal 1...
  • Page 932 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DIAGnostic subsystem The test functions are intended for services purposes. They are thus password-protected functions. Unlock the corresponding protection level to access them, see :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe]. For more information, see R&S SMW200A Service Manual. Common suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands: Suffix Value range...
  • Page 933 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DIAGnostic subsystem Return values: <Catalog> string List of all assemblies; the values are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration. Example: Example"Programming example" on page 932. Usage: Query only :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo? [<Board>]...
  • Page 934 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DIAGnostic subsystem :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount? Queris how often the instrument has been turned on so far. Return values: <PowerOnCount> integer Range: 0 to INT_MAX *RST: Example: Example"Programming example" on page 932. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Power On Count"...

  • Page 935: Hums Remote Control Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands 14.11 HUMS remote control commands The remote control commands for the health and utilizations monitoring system (HUMS) comprise commands of the DIAGnostic subsystem and the commands of the SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST and SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST subsystems. ®...
  • Page 936 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands Device history information of the connected instrument as block data in a comma-separated list: #blockdata[{event1},{event2},{event3}...] With the following parameters: <eventID>,<eventTimestamp>,<eventMessage>, <eventDetails>,<eventSeverity> Binary block data with the following syntax: #<Digits><Length><Binarydata> Indicates the start of the binary block <Digits>...
  • Page 937 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands JSON Returns the HUMS data in JSON format. Returns the HUMS data in XML format. *RST: JSON Example: //Return data in JSON format DIAG:HUMS:FORM JSON DIAGnostic:HUMS:SAVE <path> Saves the HUMS history as a ZIP file to your preferred path. Setting parameters: <path>...
  • Page 938 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Add" on page 855 DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete <ID> Deletes a certain tag you assigned to your instrument, including its key and value. Setting parameters: <ID> ID number of the tag you want to delete. To identify the ID number, query all device tags from the system first.
  • Page 939 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands Manual operation: "Key" on page 854 "Value" on page 854 "Add" on page 855 SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle <RestState> Turns communication via the REST API on and off. Parameters: <RestState> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Example: //Return REST state SYST:COMM:REST:ENAB?
  • Page 940 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact <SnmpContact> Defines the SNMP contact information for the administrator. You can also set the contact information via SNMP if you do not set it via SCPI. Parameters for setting and query: <SnmpContact>...
  • Page 941 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HUMS remote control commands Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Add SNMP User for HUMS" on page 852 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL? Queries the number of users and a list of all SNMP users for SNMPv3. Prerequisites for this command: ●...

  • Page 942: Display Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DISPlay subsystem SNMP communication is off. SNMP communication with SNMPv2 or lower. V123 SNMP communication with SNMPv2 and SNMPv3. SNMP communication with SNMPv3. *RST: V123 Example: //Select the SNMP version SYST:COMM:SNMP:VERS V12 Manual operation: "SNMP"...
  • Page 943 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DISPlay subsystem // Query the dialog IDs of all open dialogs DISPlay:DIALog:ID? // CEUtraDLGenSetDlg,_,$A DlgKeyRf_Rosc // Open and close dialogs via remote control DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN "CEUtraDLGenSetDlg,_,$A" DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN "DlgKeyRf_Rosc" DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe "DlgKeyRf_Rosc" DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL ....................943 :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff ....................943 :DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ....................
  • Page 944 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DISPlay subsystem :DISPlay:UPDate[:STATe] <Update> Activates the refresh mode of the display. Parameters: <Update> 1 | ON | 0 | OFF *RST: n.a. (factory preset: 1) Example: Example"Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 942 Manual operation: "Display Update is"...
  • Page 945 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A DISPlay subsystem Example: Example"Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 942 :DISPlay:DIALog:ID? Returns the dialog identifiers of the open dialogs in a string separated by blanks. Return values: <DialogIdList> <DialogID#1>< ><DialogID#2>< > ... < ><DialogID#n> Dialog identifiers are string without blanks.

  • Page 946: Format Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A FORMat subsystem Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "SCPI" on page 771 :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe <DialogId> Closes the specified dialog. Setting parameters: <DialogId> string To find out the dialog identifier, use the query :DISPlay: DIALog:ID?. The <DialogName> part of the query result is sufficient. Example: Example"Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dia- logs"...
  • Page 947 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A FORMat subsystem SWAPped Expects/sends the most significant byte of each IEEE754 float- ing-point number first and the least significant byte last. *RST: NORMal Example: :FORM:BORD SWAP transfers the data with the most significant bit first. :FORMat:SREGister <Format>...

  • Page 948: Hcopy Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HCOPy subsystem 14.14 HCOPy subsystem The HCOPy subsystem contains the commands to generate and save a hard copy of the display. To access a stored hard copy file, use the commands of the MEMM subsystem. Example: Store a hard copy of the display The following example lists commands to configure and execute a hard copy to an automatic named file.

  • Page 949: Hard Copy Settings

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HCOPy subsystem // "001" :HCOPy:FILE:AUTO? // queries the path and file name of the automatically generated file // "/usb/HCopy/hardcopy1607001.bmp" 14.14.1 Hard copy settings With the following commands, you can configure the settings of a hard copy.......................949 :HCOPy:DATA? ....................

  • Page 950: Automatic Naming

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HCOPy subsystem Manual operation: "Region" on page 735 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] <Name> Determines the file name and path to save the hard copy, provided automatic naming is disabled. Note: If you have enabled automatic naming, the instrument automatically generates the file name and directory, see Chapter 14.14.2, "Automatic naming",...
  • Page 951 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HCOPy subsystem Usage: Query only :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory <Directory> Determines the path to save the hard copy, if you have enabled Automatic Naming. If the directory does not yet exist, the instrument automatically creates a new directory, using the instrument name and /var/user/ by default.
  • Page 952 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A HCOPy subsystem Manual operation: "Automatic Naming" on page 733 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe <State> :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe <State> :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe <State> Uses the date parameters (year, month or day) for the automatic naming. You can acti- vate each of the date parameters separately. Parameters: <State>...

  • Page 953: Kboard Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A OUTPut subsystem 14.15 KBOard subsystem The KBOard subsystem contains the commands to set a connected keyboard....................953 :FPANel:KEYBoard:LAYout ......................953 :KBOard:LAYout :FPANel:KEYBoard:LAYout <Layout> Selects the layout of the front panel keypad. Parameters: <Layout> DIGits | LETTers DIGits Enables numerical keys only.
  • Page 954 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A OUTPut subsystem Common suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands: Suffix Value range Description OUTPut<hw> [1] | 2 Signal path ..................... 954 :OUTPut:ALL[:STATe] ....................954 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] ....................954 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON ....................955 :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe ................... 955 :OUTPut<hw>:BLANk:LIST:STATe .....................956 :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?
  • Page 955 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A OUTPut subsystem Parameters: <Pon> OFF | UNCHanged *RST: n.a. (factory preset: UNCHanged) Example: :OUTPut1:PON OFF The RF output is deactivated when the instrument is switched Manual operation: "Power-On State" on page 743 :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe <AMode> Sets the step attenuator mode at the RF output.
  • Page 956 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A OUTPut subsystem :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance? Queries the impedance of the RF outputs. Return values: <Impedance> G1K | G50 | G10K *RST: Example: :OUTPut1:IMP? queries the impedance of RF output. Response: 50 the impedance is 50 ohms Usage: Query only Manual operation:...

  • Page 957: Sense, Read, Initiate And Slist Subsystems

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:STATe <State> Attenuates the RF output signal for about 40 dB to protect external devices against internal signals. Parameters: <State> 1 | ON | 0 | OFF *RST: Example: :OUTPut1:PROT:STAT ON Attenuates the RF Output signal for about 40 dB.
  • Page 958 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Suffix Value range Description SENSe<ch> [1] to 4 Indicates the sensor Sensor mapping: ● SENSe[1] - default mapping for sensors connected to the [SENSOR] connector ● SENSe2 - sensor connected to a [USB] connector ●...
  • Page 959 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Programming examples Example: Detecting and assigning a power sensor SLISt:LIST? // Response: "NRP33SN-V-900007-USB Legacy","NRP-Z211-900001-USB Legacy" // Lists all automatically detected sensors. SLISt:SCAN:STATe 1 // Searches for sensors connected in the LAN or via the USBTMC protocol. SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor 'NRQ6',101624 // sensor name, serial number SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor 11.123.1.123, 101624 // IP address, serial number // Adds sensors to the list, that are connected to LAN.
  • Page 960 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Example: Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter Prerequisite: The sensor is connected to the instrument and mapped to the first sensor channel. SENSe1:SOURce RF // Sensor measures the power of the RF signal. SENSe1:FILTer:TYPE NSRatio // Selects fixed noise filter mode.
  • Page 961 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems ..............967 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] ................968 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio ..............968 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe ................968 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe ................. 969 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE ..................969 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency ................970 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe ..................970 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet ................970 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe ................... 971 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber? ..................971 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce .................
  • Page 962 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Setting parameters: <IP> string *RST: Example: Example"Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 959. Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Add LAN Sensor" on page 624 :SLISt:SCAN:USENsor <DeviceID>, <Serial> Scans for R&S NRP power sensors connected over a USB interface.
  • Page 963 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems :SLISt:CLEar[:ALL] Removes all R&S NRP power sensors from the list. Example: Example"Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 959. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Clear" on page 624 :SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing <Mapping>...
  • Page 964 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems The remote measurement is triggered with :READ<ch>[:POWer]?). This command also returns the measurement results. The local state is not affected, measurement results can be retrieved with local state on or off. Parameters: <Continuous>...

  • Page 965: Aperture:time

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems :SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] <Power> Selects the unit (Watt, dBm or dBμV) of measurement result display, queried with READ<ch>[:POWer]?. Parameters: <Power> DBM | DBUV | WATT *RST: Example: :SENS2:UNIT DBM Selects dBm as unit for the measured value returned by com- mand READ.
  • Page 966 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect <Select> Several S-parameter tables can be stored in a sensor. The command selects a loaded data set for S-parameter correction for the corresponding sensor. Parameters: <Select> float *RST: Manual operation: "S-Parameter"...
  • Page 967 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe <State> Activates the permanent display of the measured power level results. The instrument also indicates the sensor type, the connection, the measurement source and the offset if set. Parameters: <State>...
  • Page 968 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Example: :SENS1:FILT:TYPE USER Selects user filter mode. :SENS1:FILT:LENG 16 Sets a filter length of 16. E.g. using a sensor with 20 ms time window, the resulting measurement time is 640 ms (2x16x20 Manual operation: "Filter Length"...
  • Page 969 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Example: SENS1:FILT:TYPE USER Selects user filter mode. :SENS1:FILT:SONC Activates the search for the optimum filter length. :SENS1:FILT:LENG? Returns the found optimum filter length. Response: 128 Usage: Event Manual operation: "Auto Once"...
  • Page 970 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Parameters: <Frequency> float *RST: 1 GHz Example: :SENS1:SOUR USER Selects user-defined source. :SENS1:FREQ 2.44GHz Sets the RF frequency of the source which is 2.44 GHz. Manual operation: "Frequency" on page 620 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe <State>...
  • Page 971 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt subsystems Example: :SENS1:POW:OFFS 0.4dB Sets a level offset of 0.4 dB :SENS1:POW:OFFS:STAT ON A level offset of 0.4 dB is added to the measured value. Manual operation: "Level Offset State,Level Offset" on page 620 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber? Queries the serial number of the sensor.

  • Page 972: Sconfiguration Subsystem

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion? Queries the software version of the connected R&S NRP power sensor. Return values: <SVersion> string Example: :SENS1:POW:SVER? Queries the software version of the power sensor. Usage: Query only :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? Queries the sensor type. The type is automatically detected. Return values: <Type>...
  • Page 973 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Required options "Required options" on page 126. Common suffixes The commands in this chapter use the following common suffixes: Suffix Suffix Description Required options range BBMM<ch> 1 to 2 HS DIG I/Q input or output connec- R&S SMW-B13XT tors R&S SMW-B9 + R&S SMW-K19...
  • Page 974 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:RF1:STReam1:STATe ON SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:IQOutput1:STReam3:STATe ON SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:STReam1:FOFFset 20E6 SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:STReam1:POFFset 0 SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:RF2:STReam2:STATe ON SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:IQOutput2:STReam4:STATe ON // The digital I/Q outputs are not used. SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM1:STReam1:STATe OFF SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM2:STReam2:STATe OFF SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:FADer3:STReam3:STATe OFF SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:FADer4:STReam4:STATe OFF // ******************************************************************************** // Alternatively, add stream A&C and B&D and output the signal at the digital IQ // outputs BBMM1 and BBMM2.
  • Page 975 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem // ******************************************************************************** // Manage external instruments. // ******************************************************************************** SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:LIST? // Response: "SMBV100B,SGS_2,SGT100A,SMBVB_1,SMBVB_2,SMW200A (100010)" // Add instruments to selection. SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:ADD "SGS_1","USB","100007" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:ADD "SMW200A (100001)","LAN","10.112.11.125","2" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:LIST? // Response: "SMBV100B,SGS_2,SGT100A,SMBVB_1,SMBVB_2,SMW200A (100010),SGS_1, // SMW200A (100001)" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:REName "SGS_2","SGS (102030)" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:LIST? // Response: "SMBV100B,SGS (102030),SGT100A,SMBVB_1,SMBVB_2,SMW200A (100010),SGS_1, // SMW200A (100001)"...
  • Page 976 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem // Response: 1 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:COUPling OFF SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:FREQuency 2143000000 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:POWer -20 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:STATe ON // ******************************************************************************** // Specify the intialization sequence with a user-defined initialization file. // ******************************************************************************** MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/user/RcExtInstr" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:INITialization:CATalog? // Response: "init_seq_sgs" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:REMote:INITialization:FILE "init_seq_sgs.iec" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:ACONnect 1 *RST SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM1:INAMe?
  • Page 977 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Example: Generating digital signals SCONfiguration:PRESet SCONfiguration:MODE ADVanced SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MODE HSAL SCONfiguration:FADing FAAFBB SCONfiguration:BASeband:SOURce SEP // Set six channels at the HS DIG I/Q SCONfiguration:DIQ:BBMM1:CHANnels CH6 SCONfiguration:DIQ:BBMM2:CHANnels CH4 SCONfiguration:DIQ:BBMM1:CHANnels? // Response: "CH4" // Number of channels adapted so that the total number of channels is 8. SCONfiguration:APPLy See also Example"Enabling and configuring the HS DIG I/Q digital outputs"...
  • Page 978 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM2:STReam8:STATe? // Response: 1 Example: Controlling multiple instruments with the same application program This section provides information on remote control of a multi-instrument setup with a remote computer (external controller). In these setups, synchronize remote commands (SCPI commands) that you send to the different instruments, see Figure 14-3.
  • Page 979 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem "Your R&S SMW200A as a controller of external instruments" on page 979. Figure 14-4 shows the extent of the particular solution. Figure 14-4: Extent and impact of the provided solutions Your R&S SMW200A as a controller of external instruments Figure 14-5 shows a simplified version of the test setup on Figure...
  • Page 980 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem We assume that: ● You control the R&S SMW200A from a remote controller ● The instruments are connected to a LAN and there is no active remote channel from the controller to the external instruments ●...
  • Page 981 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM1:REMote:CONNect SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM1:RCONnection:STATe? // Response: 1 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM1:INAMe? // Response: "SGT100A [A]" // Sending SCPI commands directly to the connected external instrument SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM1:REMote:SEND ":SOURce1:FREQuency 2.1GHz" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM1:REMote:SEND ":SOURce1:FREQuency?" Example: Enbaling signal with 400 MHz fading bandwidth The following is a simple example on how to configure the settings.

  • Page 982: Multi-Instrument Configuration Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem SOURce1:FSIMulator:RESTart:MODE BBTR SOURce1:FSIMulator:STATe 1 // Configure the baseband signal incl. trigger settings. // Synchronize baseband triggering for an external common trigger source. // Adapt configuratiom. SOURce1:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SEQuence ARET SOURce1:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SOURce EGT1 SOURce1:BB:EUTRa:STATe 1 // Set frequency and level of the RF signal. SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 1950000000 SOURce2:FREQuency:CW 1950000000 SOURce1:POWer:POWer -50...

  • Page 983: Baseband And Fading Configuration Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem :SCONfiguration:MULTiinstrument:MODE <MSMode> Sets if the instrument works as a primary or as a secondary instrument. Parameters: <MSMode> PRIMary | SECondary *RST: PRIMary Example: Example"Configuring primary-secondary mode" on page 976. Manual operation: "Multi Instrument Trigger" on page 673 :SCONfiguration:MULTiinstrument:STATe <TriggerState>...
  • Page 984 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem ................988 :SCONfiguration:DIQ:BBMM2:CHANnels ................989 :SCONfiguration:DUPLicate[:STReam] ....................989 :SCONfiguration:APPLy :SCONfiguration:PRESet Presets the signal routing in the baseband section and the fading configuration to the default state. Example: Example"Distributing the streams to the output connectors" on page 973.
  • Page 985 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Options: REGenerator requires option R&S SMW-K78. GNSS requires option R&S SMW-B9. ESEQuencer requires options R&S SMW-B15/-K315. BEXTension requires options R&S SMW-B9 and R&S SMW- K555. Manual operation: "Mode" on page 128 :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MODE <Mode> Defines what kind of signal is generated and which output interfaces are enabled.
  • Page 986 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem <FadConfig> :SCONfiguration:MODE STANdard FAAFBNone | FANFBB | FAAFBB | FAAFBA | FABFBB | FAABFBN | FANFBAB | FAABFBAB ADVanced MIMO1X2 | MIMO2X2 | MIMO2X3 | MIMO2X4 | MIMO3X2 | MIMO3X3 | MIMO3X4 | MIMO4X2 | MIMO4X3 | MIMO4X4 | MIMO1X8 | MIMO8X1 | MIMO2X8 | MIMO8X2 | MIMO2X1 | MIMO2X1X2 | MIMO2X2X1 | MIMO2X1X3 | MIMO2X1X4 | MIMO2X2X2 | MIMO1X3 | MIMO3X1 |...
  • Page 987 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Parameters: <Subset> SET2 | SET1 | ALL *RST: SET1 (R&S SMW200A-B10)/ALL(R&S SMW200A- Example: Example"Enabling an 1x8x8 MIMO configuration with two R&S SMW200A" on page 981. Options: ALL requires R&S SMW200A-B9 SET2|SET1 requires R&S SMW-K821/K822. Manual operation: "Subset"...
  • Page 988 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem BB1G|BB2G 1 GHz, 2 GHz bandwidth. Available in SISO configurations. BBOUTDEF Bandwidth determined by the signal at the HS DIG I/Q. Example: Example"Enbaling signal with 400 MHz fading bandwidth" on page 981. Options: R&S SMW-K822 BB800 requires R&S SMW-K823...

  • Page 989: I/Q Stream Mapper Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem :SCONfiguration:DUPLicate[:STReam] <DuplicateStream> In a 3x1x1 or 4x1x1 configuration, creates a copy of each stream. Generates are a total number of 6 or 8 streams, where 4 of them can be signals with real-time data source.
  • Page 990 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM<ch>:CHANnel<di>:STReam<st>: STATe <State> :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:FADer<ch>:STReam<st>:STATe <State> :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:RF<ch>:STReam<st>:STATe <State> :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:BBMM<ch>:STReam<st>:STATe <State> :SCONfiguration:OUTPut:MAPPing:IQOutput<ch>:STReam<st>:STATe <State> Maps the I/Q output streams to the output connectors. The stream mapping to the FADER connectors is fixed. Parameters: <State> 1 | ON | 0 | OFF *RST: Example: Example"Distributing the streams to the output connectors"...

  • Page 991: External Rf And I/Q Instruments Commands

    ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem This offset implies a shift in the frequency domain for all signals that the stream routes to a specific output connector. For example, RF or I/Q output connectors. Value ranges depend on installed options. For more information, refer to the specifications document.
  • Page 992 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Commands: .................. 993 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:DISPlay ................994 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:ACONnect ............994 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:CONNect[:ALL] ............994 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:DISConnect[:ALL] ................994 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:PBEHaviour ............995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:DIRection? ............995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:DIRection? ............995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM<ch>:DIRection? ..............995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:RF<ch>:DIRection? ............995 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput<ch>:DIRection? ..........996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? ..........996 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? ..........
  • Page 993 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem ............999 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:SCAN:STATe? ..............1000 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:LIST? ................ 1000 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:ADD ..............1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:REName ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:DETect? ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:REMote:DETect? ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM<ch>:REMote:DETect? ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:REMote:ISELect ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:REMote:ISELect ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM<ch>:REMote:ISELect ..........1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput<ch>:REMote:ISELect ............1001 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:RF<ch>:REMote:ISELect ..........
  • Page 994 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Parameters: <DisplayMode> ALL | MAPPed | INPut | OUTPut *RST: MAPPed Example: Example"Connecting and configuring external instruments" on page 974. Manual operation: "Display" on page 139 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:ACONnect <State> Enables automatic detection and connection setup of connected external instruments. Parameters: <State>...
  • Page 995 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Example: SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:INAMe? // "SZU (999991) B1066" SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RCONnection:STATe? // 1 SOURce:FREQuency:CW? // 60000000000 SOURce1:IQ:OUTPup:ANALog:TYPE DIFFerential SCONfiguration:EXTernal:PBEHaviour 1 *RST SOURce:FREQuency:CW? // 60000000000 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RCONnection:STATe? // 1 SOURce1:IQ:OUTPup:ANALog:TYPE? // DIFF SCONfiguration:EXTernal:PBEHaviour 0 *RST SOURce:FREQuency:CW? // 1000000000 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RCONnection:STATe? // 0 SOURce1:IQ:OUTPut:ANALog:TYPE?
  • Page 996 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:CODer<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM<ch>:IQConnection:STATe? Queries the status of the I/Q connection of the digital interfaces. Return values: <IQConnState> 1 | ON | 0 | OFF Example: Example"Connecting and configuring external instruments" on page 974. Usage: Query only Manual operation:...
  • Page 997 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Example: Example"Connecting and configuring external instruments" on page 974. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Instrument Name" on page 143 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:FADer<ch>:RF:COUPling <RfCouplingState> :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:BBMM<ch>:RF:COUPling <RfCouplingState> :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:RF<ch>:RF:COUPling <RfCouplingState> :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput<ch>:RF:COUPling <RfCouplingState> Enables/disables coupling all major RF setting (like the frequency, level and RF state) of the external instrument to the R&S SMW200A.
  • Page 998 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Parameters: <FreqOffset> float Range: -3E9 to 3E9 Increment: 0.01 *RST: Example: SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 2143E6 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:COUPling ON SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:FREQuency:OFFSet 20E6 // The resulting RF frequency of the external instrument is // RF = 2143E6 + 20E6 = 2.163 GHz // Where both the RF frequency and the frequency offset // are applied at the external instrument Manual operation:...
  • Page 999 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Example: SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -30 SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:COUPling ON SCONfiguration:EXTernal:IQOutput1:RF:POWer:OFFSet -20 // RF level of the external instrument is -50 dB // Where both the RF level and the level offset // are applied at the external instrument Manual operation: "(Delta) RF Frequency/ RF Level"...
  • Page 1000 ® Remote control commands R&S SMW200A SCONfiguration subsystem Not scanning Example: Example"Connecting and configuring external instruments" on page 974. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Scan" on page 147 :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:LIST? Lists all available instruments. Instruments found, e.g. by the com- :SCONfiguration:EXTernal:REMote:SCAN mand.

This manual is also suitable for:

1412.0000.02

Table of Contents